WO1997018661A1 - Intelligent information routing system and method - Google Patents

Intelligent information routing system and method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1997018661A1
WO1997018661A1 PCT/US1996/018156 US9618156W WO9718661A1 WO 1997018661 A1 WO1997018661 A1 WO 1997018661A1 US 9618156 W US9618156 W US 9618156W WO 9718661 A1 WO9718661 A1 WO 9718661A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
script
handle
simulator
database
operable
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1996/018156
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
James A. Brewster
Srikanth Subramanian
Thomas D. Hite
Gene William Lee
Gary Lee Brannick
Original Assignee
Answersoft, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Answersoft, Inc. filed Critical Answersoft, Inc.
Priority to AU11190/97A priority Critical patent/AU1119097A/en
Publication of WO1997018661A1 publication Critical patent/WO1997018661A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M3/00Automatic or semi-automatic exchanges
    • H04M3/42Systems providing special services or facilities to subscribers
    • H04M3/50Centralised arrangements for answering calls; Centralised arrangements for recording messages for absent or busy subscribers ; Centralised arrangements for recording messages
    • H04M3/51Centralised call answering arrangements requiring operator intervention, e.g. call or contact centers for telemarketing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M3/00Automatic or semi-automatic exchanges
    • H04M3/42Systems providing special services or facilities to subscribers
    • H04M3/50Centralised arrangements for answering calls; Centralised arrangements for recording messages for absent or busy subscribers ; Centralised arrangements for recording messages
    • H04M3/527Centralised call answering arrangements not requiring operator intervention
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M3/00Automatic or semi-automatic exchanges
    • H04M3/42Systems providing special services or facilities to subscribers
    • H04M3/42314Systems providing special services or facilities to subscribers in private branch exchanges
    • H04M3/42323PBX's with CTI arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M3/00Automatic or semi-automatic exchanges
    • H04M3/42Systems providing special services or facilities to subscribers
    • H04M3/50Centralised arrangements for answering calls; Centralised arrangements for recording messages for absent or busy subscribers ; Centralised arrangements for recording messages
    • H04M3/51Centralised call answering arrangements requiring operator intervention, e.g. call or contact centers for telemarketing
    • H04M3/5166Centralised call answering arrangements requiring operator intervention, e.g. call or contact centers for telemarketing in combination with interactive voice response systems or voice portals, e.g. as front-ends

Definitions

  • This invention relates in general to the fields of telecommunications and data processing and more particularly to an improved intelligent information routing system and method.
  • an intelligent information router system comprises a telephony controller which is coupled to a private branch exchange through a link interface.
  • the telephony controller communicates with a handle manager and a script interpreter engine.
  • Telephony controller receives information from the link interface regarding telephone calls being placed to the private braich exchange.
  • Telephony controller initiates actions within the script interpreter engine that, in turn, access information stored in a database through a database controller. Responsive to the action of the script interpreter engine, the telephony controller can then instruct the private branch exchange to route the call to an appropriate location within a company depending upon the information received by the PBX through automatic transmission of data or interaction with the calling party.
  • FIGURE 1 is a schematic block diagram of the environment in which an intelligent information router system of the present invention may operate;
  • FIGURE 2 is a schematic block diagram of the internal architecture of the intelligent information router system of the present invention.
  • FIGURES 3a, 3b and 3c and FIGURES 4a and 4b are flow diagrams illustrating the operation of various components within the intelligent information router of the present invention, illustrate the screens, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention;
  • FIGURE 5 illustrates a block diagram of a specific embodiment of the intelligent information router system of the present invention
  • FIGURE 6a-g illustrate the installation screens, options and operations of a user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention
  • FIGURE 7 illustrates the set-up screen, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention
  • FIGURE 8 illustrates agent station screens, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention
  • FIGURES 9a-d illustrate simulator screens, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention.
  • FIGURES lOa-e illustrate testing screens, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention.
  • FIGURE 1 is a schematic block diagram of a telecommunications system 10 which comprises a telephony server 12 which is coupled through a computer telephone interface link to a private branch exchange 14.
  • Private branch exchange 14 is coupled through a plurality of trunk lines to a central office 16.
  • private branch exchange 14 is connected to telephones 16, 18 and 20 within agent stations 22, 24 and 26, respectively.
  • Agent stations 22, 24 and 26 also comprise agent work stations 28, 30 and 32.
  • the agent stations 28, 30 and 32 are coupled to a local area network 34.
  • An administration workstation 36 is also connected to local area network 34.
  • the telephony server 12 is connected to local area network 34 through a network interface 38.
  • the telephone server 12 is connected to the CTI link through a link interface 40.
  • the PBX may comprise a G-3 PBX manufactured by AT&T.
  • the CTI link would comprise an AT&T ASAI link.
  • the link interface 40 would comprise an ISDN-BRI board within the telephony server 12.
  • the telepnony server 12 may comprise a Pentium-class personal computer running the Novell netware telephony server system.
  • the telephony server provides a platform for an intelligent information router system 42.
  • the architecture of the intelligent information router system 42 will be described more completely with reference to FIGURE 2.
  • calls are received from central office 16 to virtual device numbers within PBX 14.
  • the PBX 14 then generates route requests which are transferred via the CTI link to the intelligent information router 42 within telephony server 12.
  • the intelligent information router 42 processes the route request and generates a route select or a request for further information which is transferred back to the PBX 14 through the CTI link.
  • the PBX 14 can request information from the calling party using an interactive voice response engine 44 resident on PBX 14.
  • the PBX 14 can solicit customer information using the IVR engine 44 on its own or in response to a request for further information from the intelligent information router 42. Eventually, the intelligent information router 42 will finish processing the route request and will instruct the PBX 14 to route the call to one of the particular agent stations 22, 24 or 26. In addition, information is transmitted via the network interface 38 and the LAN 34 to database facilities 46, 48 and 50 within agent workstations 28, 30 and 32, respectively. In this manner, using information about the calling party, including an automatic number identification information or information which is solicited using the IVR engine 44, the intelligent information router 42 can access a database using predefined scripts to route the call to an appropriate agent and to supply that agent with information about the calling party. In this manner, for example, a sales organization can route a call to the particular agent assigned to a particular client and present the agent with a recent history of sales activity for that client before the agent says the first word to the client.
  • the administration workstation 36 is used to create new scripts using a simulator system 52.
  • the database managed by the intelligent information router 42 is also accessed and administered using a database administration system 54 within the administration workstation 36.
  • the intelligent information router 42 is also administered, maintained and modified using a router administration client 56 within the administration workstation 36.
  • great care is taken in the architecture of the intelligent information router 42 to allow for the alteration of scripts used by the router 42 while the system is active.
  • the database accessed by the router 42 and the agent stations 22, 24 and 26 and the administration workstation 36 is constantly changing. Mechanisms are also in place within the architecture of the intelligent information router 42 to allow for these changes to take olace without interfering from the current activity of the system.
  • FIGURE 2 is a schematic block diagram which illustrates the architecture of the intelligent information router 42.
  • the information router 42 receives route requests and transmits requests for information and route select data to the PBX 14 through a link interface 40.
  • the link interface 40 uterfaces with a telephony controller 58 for all telephony related events, data transfers and instructions.
  • the information router system 42 recei/es other non- telephony related information as well as database accesses and updates through an external data manager 60 which is coupled to the local area network 34 through the network interface 38.
  • Administration of the telephony controller and the remainder of the information rou:er system 42 occurs through the operation of a router administration server 62 which is also coupled to the network interface 38 and communicates with the router administration client 56 within administration workstation 36 through the communication path formed by network interface 38 and local area network 34.
  • the handle manager 64 communicates with the external data manager 60, the telephony controller 58 and a script interpreter engine 64 and a database controller 66.
  • the handle manager 64 maintains a list of all active handles and is accessed by the remaining components of the information router 42 to insure the duplicative effort is not created.
  • the handle manager 64 maintains a list of all active handles and is accessed by the remaining components of the information router 42 to insure the duplicative effort is not created.
  • the handle manager 64 is allowed to operate constantly while scripts are updated, database information is changed, or any other components are altered.
  • the script interpreter engine 65 uses a script storage system 68 for the storage of the data files which comprise the script of activities to be performed by the system 42.
  • the script interpreter engine also comprises a time utility 70, a string parse utility 72 and a file I/O utility 74.
  • the time utility 70 is invoked to monitor and commence time-based events.
  • the string parse utility 72 is used to perform string searches and to parse through alphanumeric and character-based data.
  • the file I/O utility 74 is invoked to access data in files within script storage system 68 and other storage systems accessible to the system 42.
  • the database controller 66 accesses a database engine 76 which in turn accesses physical database storage system 78.
  • the database engine 76 may comprise any suitable database such as a BTrieve-based system.
  • an external event is received by the router system 42 through the telephony controller 58 or the external data manager 60.
  • external telephony events are processed by the telephony controller 58 and all other external events are processed by the external data manager 60.
  • a telephone call received by the PBX 14 creates a route request event which is received by the telephony controller 58. This route request is then processed by first creating a telephony handle using the handle manager 64. The script interpreter engine 65 is then invoked to process the call.
  • the processing of the call may result in a variety of actions by the system 42, including a request for more information from the PBX 14 or an access to the database engine 76 to retrieve information about the calling party or the call.
  • the telephony event may result in the telephony controller 58 forwarding a route selection command to the PBX instructing the PBX where to route the particular call.
  • the architecture shown in FIGURE 2 is r.ot limited to the telephony application described previously.
  • other events can be input into the system through the external data manager 60 to similarly cause scripts to be invoked through the script interpreter engine 65.
  • other application programs can coirmunicate with the external data manager 60 using direct data exchange mechanisms or network data exchange mechanisms. These data transfers to the external data manager 60 can cause scripts to be invoked.
  • a separate application program may monitor a particular stock price. The application program can then cause a data transmission to the external data manager 60 when a particular threshold value for the stock is reached.
  • a script could then be invoked using the script interpreter engine 65 to issue a buy or sell command that can be passed out through the external data manager 60 to a separate program that interfaces with a purchasing or selling agent in that stock.
  • the same system 42 is also present in each of the agent stations 22, 24 and 26, and particularly the agent work stations 28, 30 and 32, respectively.
  • a network message informing the agent's workstations 28, 30 and 32 is also routed simultaneously.
  • the network message is received by an external data manager 60 within, for example, the agent station 28.
  • This network message causes a script within the agent workstation 28 to be invoked. This script could cause certain information to be displayed to the agent on the workstation 28.
  • particular records within the database engine 76 may be retrieved.
  • the agent working at agent workstation 28 will simultaneously receive the call on the telephone 16 and will view the selected database information about the client-calling party simultaneously with the call ringing or even before the call rings.
  • the administration workstation 36 functions to manage the operation of system 42.
  • the simulator system 52 comprises a complete implementation of the system 42 within administration workstation 36. All of the components shown in FIGURE 2 with the exception of the link interface 40 are present within administration workstation 36 and simulator 52. Link interface 40 is replaced with a graphical user interface to the administration displayable on the administration workstation 36. In this way, new scripts can be developed and tested using the simulator 52.
  • the database administration system 54 s used by the administrator working at administration workstation 36 to access the database engine 76 and the database storage 78 remotely. These accesses are routed throucrh the network interface 38 and the router administration server 62. This same communication path is also used by the administration workstation 36 to download new scripts to the script interpreter engine 65 and the physical script storage facility 68.
  • the method of the present invention for routing a call begins at step 100 and proceeds to step 105.
  • a route request is received by the telephony controller 58 from the link interface 40.
  • the telephony controller 58 continuously monitors the link interface 40 for route requests.
  • the telephony controller 58 determines at step 110 if a telephony handle exists for the route request.
  • the preferred method is a multi-step process that begins at step 250 and proceeds to step 255.
  • the telephony controller 58 creates a prototype telephony handle for the route request.
  • the telephony controller 58 accesses the list of existing telephony handles stored on the handle manager 64.
  • the telephony controller 58 receives the existing telephony handles from the handle manager m binary sequence.
  • the binary number of each telephony handle is determined by the numeric value of the handle's Call ID.
  • the telephony controller 58 compares the binary number of the existing telephony handles received from the handle manager 64 with the binary number of the prototype handle created for the route request. If the binary number of an existing handle is the same as the binary of the prototype handle, then a telephony handle already exists for the route request. However, if no existing telephony handle has the same binary value as the prototype handle, then a telephony handle does not exist for the route request and one must be created. Returning to FIGURE 3A, if a telephony handle does not exist for the route request, the NO branch of decisional step 110 leads to step 115.
  • the telephony controller 58 creates a telephony handle for the route request.
  • the telephony controller 58 assigns the telephony handle a reference count of 1.
  • the telephony controller 58 then stores the telephony handle to the handle manager 64 at step 125.
  • the telephony handle is stored m the handle manager 64 in accordance with its binary value. This is accomplished by calling the existing handles stored in binary sequence and locating the appropriate position for the new telephony handle.
  • Step 125 leads to step 130 wherein the telephony handle is used to determine a script file name.
  • step 130 the telephony handle is used to determine a script file name.
  • the telephony controller 58 determines a script file name for the route request.
  • the telephony controller 58 determines the script file name by using the VDN of the route request, which is packaged with the telephony handle.
  • step 135 the telephony controller 58 uses the script file name to call a script API to the script interpretation engine 65.
  • Step 135 leads to decisional step 140.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 determines if a script handle exists for the script file name.
  • the preferred process for determining whether a script handle exists for the script file name is shown by FIGURE 3C.
  • FIGURE 3C the preferred method of determination of whether a script handle exists is a multi-step process that starts at step 300 and proceeds to step 305.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 creates a prototype script handle.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 accesses the list of existing script handles stored on the handle manager 64.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 receives existing script handles from the handle manager 65 in binary sequence. The binary number of a script handle is determined by the value of the script file name.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 compares the binary number of each existing script handle with the binary number of the prototype script handle. If the binary number of an existing script handle matches the binary number of the prototype script handle, the script handle already exists. However, if the binary number of the prototype script handle does not match the binary number of an existing script handle, the script handle does not exist and one must be created.
  • step 145 the script interpretation engine 65 creates a script handle.
  • step 150 an executable file is created for the script handle.
  • step 155 the script interpretation engine 65 assigns the script handle a reference count of 1.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 then stores the script handle to the handle manager leads to 64 at step 160. Stop 160 leads to step 200.
  • decisional step 165 the script interpretation engine determines if the existing script handle is for the most recent version of the script.
  • Whether the script handle is for the most recent version of the script is determined by comparing the date of the prototype script handle that was created at step 140 with the date of the existing script handle. If the script handle is not for the most recent version of the script, the NO branch of decisional step 165 leads to step 170.
  • the script interpretation engine replaces the outdated script handle with the new script handle.
  • the old script handle is not deleted. Rather, at step 190, the old script handle is retrieved to ensure that it is not deleted until all current calls using that script handle are complete.
  • the reference count of the olc script handle is decreased by 1. As a result, when all calls currently using the old script handle are complete, the reference count of the old script handle will become 0. Thereafter, the old script then will be automatically deleted by the handle manager. Accordingly, the present invention allows scripts to be updated and immediately used for calls received thereafter without interruption of current calls using an old script.
  • step 200 the script interpretation engine 65 increases the reference count of the script handle b/ 1.
  • step 205 the script interpretation engine 65 determines a route select based on the script.
  • step 210 the script interpretation engine 65 sends the route select to the telephony controller 58, which forwards the route select to the PBX via the link interface 40. The PBX then routes the call in accordance with the route select.
  • the telephony controller 58 decreases the reference count of the script handle by 1 at step 215. Accordingly, when a script handle is in use, it has a reference count greater than 1. When a script handle is idle, it has a reference count equal to 1. When a script handle is outdated and thereafter becomes idle, its reference count drops to 0. Script handles having a value of 0 are automatically deleted by the handle manager 64. Script handles having a value of 1 are known by the system to be idle. Script handles having a value of 2 or greater are known to be in use and, even if outdated, will not have the reference count reduced to 0 and thereby be deleted until the current use is completed.
  • the present invention provides dynamic extensibility in executing scripts.
  • the preferred script execution process of the present invention begins at step 350 and proceeds to step 355.
  • an external module is loaded.
  • step 360 a function of the module is bound in the script.
  • the script will execute the function when called at step 365.
  • FIGURE 4B The preferred process carried out by the script when called is shown by FIGURE 4B.
  • the process starts at step 400 and proceeds to step 405.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 places each individual parameter of the function directly onto the hardware stack.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 marks the position of the hardware stack. This will enable the script interpretation engine 65 to later clear the stack.
  • the script calls the external function without parameters, which are aLready on the hardware stack.
  • the bound function is executed on the parameters on the hardware stack.
  • the script interpretation engine 65 determines if the external function cleared the stack. If the function failed to clear the stack, the NO branch of decisional step 425 leads to step 430.
  • the script interpretation engine clears the stack. Returning to decisionaJ step 425, if the external function cleared the stack, the YES branch of decisional step leads to step 435 wherein the process is complete.
  • Example 1 shows script including code that loads, binds and calls an external function in accordance with the dynamic extensibility of the present invention is provided for the benefit of the reader as part of the specification at the end of the description.
  • the module "User32" is loaded and the "LmeTo" function is bound to the new script word "LmeTo”.
  • the function takes three parameters that are each integers. Accordingly, the parameters will be loaded directly onto the hardware stack and left for manipulation by the function. Thus, when the function is called, the function will directly manipulate the parameters on the stack to carry out the desired operation.
  • BindFunction (hUser32Handle, "wp ⁇ ntfA”, “sprmtf”, “INT”, -1, 0, 1000) BindFunction(hUser32Handle, “GetDC”, “GetDC”, “INT”, 1) BindFunction (hUser32Handle, "ReleaseDC”, “ReleaseDC”, “INT”, 2)
  • BindFunction (hGDI32Handle, "LineTo”, “LmeTo”, “INT”, 3) BindFunction(hGDI32Handle, "MoveToEx”, “MoveToEx”, “INT”, 4)
  • the IIR design is based on two overriding principles. First, extensibility is of utmost importance. Second, field maintenance requires that field upgrades be easy and cost effective to implement. This can mean, among other things that field upgrades should be possible without stopping the system. To support these requirements, the design uses a multiple module single level communication bus.
  • the Intelligent Call Routing Language scripting engine ICRL
  • the Intelligent Call Routing Telephony module ICRTEL
  • ICRDB Intelligent Call Routing Customer Database module
  • ICRMSC Intelligent Call Routing General Utilities module
  • Each module is responsible for the creation of information sets (data objects) which pertain to the module's subject.
  • the information sets are created on behalf of ICRL. Once created and initialized handles to the information packets are given to ICRL which then manages access and destruction of the information sets. This is discussed detail in the ICRHANDLE API Specifications.
  • the information sets can be accessed and manipulated through the dynamically bound API's exposed to ICRL (and therefore available to scripts) by any of the functional modules.
  • IIR implements a multiple level Audit Trail execution dump facility.
  • Audit Trail files provide a complete log of the execution path of a script and the code executed by the script.
  • An incoming call arrives at the PBX 2.
  • ICRTEL receives a corresponding event via the telephony system communicating with the CTI link.
  • ICRTEL creates (allocates) a data information packet which holds all known information about the call, including ANI, DNIS, Prompted Digits, etc. 4. ICRTEL calls a fixed (known) entr/ point inside the ICRL module which begins the call routing process.
  • the ICRL interpreter runs the relevant scripts to process the call. In doing so, the scripts can and will use the functions exported by the various dynamically bound components. 6. Using the function calls exposed to the ICRL interpreter, the scripts call ICRDB to access a customer database to either find or create a new customer record.
  • the script receives a handle to the record which that customer's data is cached (in memory) .
  • the script then calls another ICRDB function to look up the most recent agent to service the customer.
  • ICRL is a free-form, interpreted language which has structured programming features. All functionality beyond language definition will be handled externally through script function calls, provided to ICRL, by other modules within the system. ICRL defines nothing about the services it ga s from other modules of IIR, but requires them in order to carry out any interesting actions such as a call route. ICRL is built as a stand alone Windows DLL or a Novell NLM. The ICR prefix of the name is a misnomer of the project which bore out this design. ICR-. is useful to any task automation process where information feeds can be attached and script functionality defined to access and manipulate the information.
  • ICRL provides a couple of intrinsic functions through which scripts can load an external module and then bind script function names to functions within the external module. IC ⁇ L adds these functions and the syntactical names to its table of known tokens in the interpreter.
  • ICRL Startup Phase At system startup time, the ICRL engine will initialize itself which might include location and loading of global scripts.
  • ICRL engine will go into a listening mode where it will wait for command process requests from any of the modules.
  • the individual modules then may call ICRL
  • the ICRL engine provides two simple calls in its API either one of which external IIR modules can use to run scripts directly. They are ICRLRunScript ( ) and ICRLRunScriptEx ( ) .
  • ICRExecuteScnptThreadO and ICRLRunScriptEx ( ) accept variable number of arguments which are handed to the script as command line-like arguments.
  • ICRTEL creates or updates the related information packet a nd calls ICRCreat eS c r l p tThread ( ) and ICRExecuteScnptThreadO with its module ID and the handle which identifies the modified information packet as an argument.
  • the handle contains pertinent information about the call for which the event triggered a script run, such as CalllD, ANI, DNIS, etc.
  • the Telephony component creates such a handle for each active call. Functions called from scripts back into the telephony component can use the handle to retrieve information about the call. Handle usage and specifications are discussed in detail in ICRHANDLE API below.
  • the ICRL engine loads a pre-defined script and runs it. This script may, in turn, load and run other scripts using ICRLRunScript () or ICRLRunScriptEx () . Any of the startup scripts can make calls to the two ICRL intrinsic functions: LoadModule ( ) and BindFunction ( ) which allow loading of all external IIR modules and binding of script function names to function pointers within the external module.
  • ICRL engine requires no knowledge of the outside world - i.e. which events stimulate script runs and which functions are available during a script execution.
  • the entire system is fully dynamic. This is the key to field upgradability. Since ICRL allows infinite external modules, different versions of the same module can be run at ;he same time. This allows the IIR to be upgraded while running.
  • the ICRL interpreter engine is implemented using the UNIX compiler generation tools Lex and Yacc.
  • Lex and Yacc together form a powerful compiler definition tool set through which syntax for a language definition can be specified human readable form.
  • the C source code generated by Lex and Yacc is encapsulated in a C/C++ layer that forms the complete parser/interpreter engine.
  • ICRL module In addition to the ICRL parser, two other issues are handled by the ICRL module - memory management and string management. Memory management is completely handle based. All functional modules allocate their information packets on behalf of the ICRL engine. These packets are known as handles which relate events to the tied information. Handle aggregation is the technique used to tie the disparate pieces of information with reference counts and the modules that created and can act on the packets. The ICRL module performs all handle management and owns all handles even though the functional modules create and initialize them. ICRL must own the handles because there may be multiple scripts running and accessing the same information simultaneously. Rather than let each module implement its own referencing strategy, a common strategy is implemented by ICRL. This is explained below in detail in ICRHANDLE API Specifications.
  • ICRL Error Reporting and Audit Trail Logging ICRL allows two forms of error reporting. First, a syntax pre-parse of scripts will be performed on all scripts. Prior to running a script, whether for simulation purposes or actual implementation, ICRL reads and parses the script in order to build an execution tree. At each point in the script parsing, ICRL knows whether the script is in proper ICRL form and matches syntactical rules. If the rules are broken at any point in a script, ICRL will provide error reports stating the line number and expected syntax at the point the script is in violation and terminate the pre-parse.
  • Termination is not strictly required, as the recursive decent parser of ICRL is capable of continuing, the parse state after a syntax error can't be guaranteed and significant syntax fallout can occur. In such a case, large amounts of errors will be generated which could actually be erroneous errors.
  • ICRL will provide audit trail logging of each code entry point entered during the script execution. It is not possible to define, completely, at this point how much audit trail logging will exist in any given entry point. At the least, each entry point will provide two logs. First the entry which logs all parameters passed into the entry point. Second, the exit point and all parameters and all return values. Any information packet handle will be recursively dumped to the audit trail file.
  • the ICRHANDLE type is the object by which all IIR subsystems transfer their information into and out of the
  • the base handle consists of the following members listed below in Table 1:
  • CTINT nModulelD This is the unique module identifier
  • CTINT bLog TRUE if this object should be dumped to the audit trail log.
  • ICRHANDLE h2 ICRHANDLE h2 ; subsystem. int Pointer to function provided by
  • HandleDestroy ( ICRHANDLE ) ; issues with respect to a handle of information and frees the handle itself. void Dumps the handle to the
  • the ICRHANDLE API will handle all storage and lookup of all handles.
  • the API exposes a high speed lookup mechanism for locating handles based on the contained information and the
  • HandleFmd (ICRHANDLE Locates a handle in the hLooksLikeThis) ; handle tables via a (possibly temporary) handle filled with enough information to complete calls to the HandleCompare method.
  • the nModulelD must be provided, as well as any information required by the c a l l i n g mo d u l e ' s HandleCompare entry point.
  • HandleAddToTable (ICRHANDLE Adds a handle to the table of hAdd) ; handles currently known to the system. This method should always be called after handle creation and initialization. Note that the ICRHANDLE API does not call HandleAddRef. This way calls to Decre entReference do not have to distinguish between whether a handle has a reference and if so, is it in the tables. The handle must be fully initialized before calling this entry point . HandleRemoveFromTable Removes a handle from the (ICRHANDLE hRemove); table of handles currently known to the system. This method should be required only rarely handle manager will automatically remove handles from its tables when they are about to be destroyed void Dumps the base handle portion HandleDump (ICRHANDLE) ; of a handle to the current
  • HandleDestroy (ICRHANDLE Destroys the handle. This hDestroy) ; method automatically locates the correct module and entry point m that module to call for proper destruction.
  • CTINT nCalllD CTINT nCrossRefID
  • CTCHAR szDevice[32] CTCHAR szlnstrument [32] ;
  • PTELHANDLE p2 (PTELHANDLE) h2;
  • CTINT nCo pare pl->nCallID - p2->nCallID; return nCompare > 0 ? 1 : nCompare ⁇ 0) -1 :
  • the IIR's main purpose at revision level 1.0 will be efficient, intelligent call routing.
  • a complete telephony module must be included which implements the functionality required to perform the route command based on the decision logic in the routing scripts. ICRTEL is this module.
  • this module is rather limited, in that its only job is to provide Get/Set methods on the information packets created to represent active calls, methods to perform route sequences. Routing sequences are defined in the ICRL scripts. The route requests within the scripts are carried out by this module.
  • the PBX delivers the call events across the
  • ICRTEL receives the event message and creates an information packet which holds all pertinent information and history about the call. 4. ICRTEL calls ICRCreateScriptThread ( ) and
  • ICRExecuteScriptThread( ) to run a script e.nd passes the ICRHANDLE which represents the information packet.
  • the Script makes Database lookups as necessary to determine the correct route 6.
  • the Script calls ICRTEL indirectly through the dynamically bound script functions.
  • ICRTEL performs the desired request, which may be a Get/Set request or a route.
  • a route takes two forms, temporary or terminating.
  • a temporary route is a request to route the call to a VDN in order to collect additional InfoDigits.
  • the script which requests a temporary route does not terminate, rather it is suspended until the VDN collection is complete, after which the script resumes.
  • ICRTEL fills additional InfoDigit packets in the call information packet corresponding to the call. This additional InfoDigit information is appended to the InfoDigit information already present. Appendage is required in order to allow historical decisions based on the VDN paths during a complete route.
  • Terminating route requests are routes which are known to have reached the call's final destination. This is representative of a call being sent to a specific agent or agent group.
  • the terminating call route does not, however, terminate the script. It simply terminates the call's ability to be routed to additional sites. The only exception to this rule is if PBX allows a call to be removed from a queue, assuming the call is still m a queue. In such a case, another ICRTEL script API might provide access to that functionality. The script resumes even after a terminating route request, though, so additional logging might be made or other not-routing commands . Since the ICRL engine provides for information packet handle management, ICRTEL does not attempt to manage the handles it creates. ICRTEL inserts, via HandleAddToTables () , handles to the information packets it creates. No other memory and/or handle management is required. Examples of ICRTEL API exposed to scripts follows in Example 3.
  • Example 3 Example 3
  • ICRTELRoute ICRHANDLE
  • ICRDB Intelligent Call Routing Database Module
  • IIR The IIR's ma purpose at revision level 1.0 will be efficient, intelligent call routing. For this to take place, a complete database module must be included which implements the functionality required to perform the route command based on customer database information.
  • ICRDB is a generic implementation of customer records.
  • ICRDB The first version of ICRDB allowed onl ⁇ simple single field queries.
  • the current version of ICRDB (ICRDBSQL) implements a generic SQL query and update ability.
  • ICRDB provides methods to perform queries on the database, find the count of records matching a query and standard forward/reverse traversals (enumeration) of the records. Additionally, withm each record, ICRDB provides Get/Set methods per field. This is a difficult issue and may change in design before final shipment of the IIR.
  • ICRDB provides Get/Set methods per field. This is a difficult issue and may change in design before final shipment of the IIR. The nature of this module is as follows:
  • the PBX delivers the call events across the
  • ICRTEL receives the event message and creates an information packet which holds all pertinent information and history about the call. 4. ICRTEL calls ICRCreateScriptThread ( ) and
  • ICRExecuteScriptThread ( ) to run a script and passes the ICRHANDLE which represents the information packet.
  • the Script makes a query on the customer database based on ANI .
  • ICRDB runs an SQL statement against the database engine which generates a record set of matches. The records are stored n an ICRHANDLE subclass and the handle is returned to the Script.
  • the Script requests from ICRDB, the number (count) of matching records in the record set.
  • the Script decides, after locating the correct record, that a Spanish speaking agent is required.
  • the Scripts requests ICRTEL to route the call to a Spanish speaking agent.
  • ICRDB Since the ICRL engine provides for information packet handle management, ICRDB does not attempt to manage the handles it creates. ICRDB inserts, via HandleAddToTable () , handles to the record sets created during the running of a script. The disadvantage of this is that it is the responsibility of the script programmer tc request that ICRL remove the record set handles prior to script termination. No other memory and/or handle management is required. Examples of ICRDB API exposed to scripts follows in Example 4.
  • ICRL design of ICRL is based on extensibility requirements.
  • the separation of language features from external functions and dynamic binding of functions makes ICRL very flexible. New functions or even whole components and media (information) feeds could be adced to the IIR with minimal effort.
  • Lex and Yacc guarantees not only good maintenance of code but also extensibility of language features for future releases.
  • the Intelligent Information Router is a server- based application for routing incoming telephone calls based upon call information and a set of rules.
  • the IIR application has the following components: Table 5
  • Appendix A provides reference commands for the scripting language you will use to build the IIIR scripts.
  • Appendix B shows samples of typical scripts.
  • Appendix C lists the terms and acronyms used in this manual.
  • Appendix D lists the error messages and the appropriate actions to take for each. From within the program, you can also open the online help topics for quick access to commonly- requested information. Each module has its own self- contained help file. You can open online help from the help menu in any major window for the topics specific to that window. Understanding Typographical Conventions
  • Information Router allows you to install all or a portion of the program files. You will need to know a few details about your system to install the files successfully, so pl ease take a moment to review this chapter before you begin to ensure that you have all the information you will need.
  • NLMs NetWare Modules/ (NLMs) are not running on the server. All exi sting NLMs mus t not be running when you install the NLM. Check this by running "modules " a t the NetWare system prompt . Key IIR NLMs incl ude ICRCTL , ICRL , CTNET, CTIPX, CTUTS . To Unload Existing NLMs, qui t ICRS CONSOLE and unl oad ICRS by running ' "uli crs " a t system consol e prompts .
  • the first window to appear is the setup window 500. This window identifies you as the user. 1. Type your first and last names 501.
  • the installation looks for existing database files. If you have existing database files, a dialog box appears and asks if you want to overwrite the old database. Use the following guidelines. If you have backed up the database file, click the Continue button (you can copy your old database file later into the directory if necessary) . If you have not backed up the database file, but do not want to overwrite the file, click the Quit button to stop the installation process and return to the IIR Setup window. If you want to overwrite the old database, click the Continue button. When you install more modules within the same installation session, the message will not appear again.
  • the NLM window 505 installs the NetWare Loadable Module (NLM) on the server . If you are reinstalling this module over an old one, make certain that the existing IIR NLM module is not running.
  • NLM NetWare Loadable Module
  • Mapped Drive and Path 506 type the drive and path where IIR will install the files.
  • NetWare Volume 508 type the server's volume name (for example ASH) .
  • Switch ID 510 type (pull-down list only) the name of the telephony switch (should display the default switch ID) .
  • the simulator window 511 installs the script simulator, designed to run on Win 32S.
  • For Install Path 512 type location to install the Simulator module.
  • the VDN Administrator window 517 installs the VDN Administrator for matching scripts to the Vector Directory Number (VDN) .
  • VDN Vector Directory Number
  • For Server IPX Address 520 type IPX address of your server. The IPX address is defined in the autoexec.ncf file the system subdirectory of the NetWare server.
  • the line titled lpx internal will provide the first eight characters of the IPX address (network address) followed by the entity within the network or server domain (usually "1" for the server) . For example, if the line says "ipx internal net 6125100A" then the address is "6125100A.000000000001. " For User Ini Files Path 522 type location for your user initiation files .
  • the Agent Station Window 523 installs the Agent Station module, which Agents use to modify information the database.
  • Agents use to modify information the database.
  • For Install Path 524 type location to install the Agent Station module.
  • Database Path 526 type location of the production database path on the network server. This path is a combination of the network drive with the NLMs and the subdirectory containing the database. For example, if your network drive is L, and your subdirectory is ⁇ r, then use the database path L. ⁇ nr ⁇ data.
  • the Database Administrator Window 527 installs the Database Administrator module, which Administrators use to set up the Agent Stations.
  • For Install Path 528 type location to install the Database Administrator module.
  • For Database Path 530 type location of the production database path on the network server. This path is a combination of the network drive with the NLMs and the subdirectory containing the database. For example, if your network drive is L, and your subdirectory is Mir, then use the database path L : ⁇ iir ⁇ da ta .
  • the IIR does not use a common interface for all tasks. Ordinarily you simply open the IIR folder and click the icon for the module you want to use. If you have just installed the IIR, however, you will first want to understand where to go from here, and why. You have ust installed up to four client applications for the Intelligent Call Router: Database Administrator, Agent Station, Simulator and VDN Administrator.
  • the Database Administrator allows anyone with administration privileges to set up the database and perform other tasks which globally affect the Intelligent Information Router. As shown by FIGURE 7, the Database Administrator has a single window 600, which allows you to set up the fields that appear in the IIR Agent Station window. You can label the fields, designate agent privileges (view and modify) for each of the fields, and define the primary key fields.
  • the Primary Key fields 602 protect against duplicate data. You can choose one of three options in the Primary Key Definition area. None 604 turns off the Primary Key Field designation. Field 1 606 sets the first field as Primary Key. Field 1 and 2 608 sets the first and second fields as Primary Keys.
  • the Agent Station window 700 is predefined by the Database Administrator (described in the previous chapter) . With this window, an agent can modify the information in the database. To modify the fields shown, you must have modification privileges (see "Setting
  • the first four fields contain information that the IIR engine uses to search the database. When it finds a match, it displays all fields for the record. To search the database,
  • the IIR When you search the database, the IIR produces exact matches only, with one exception. If you type "Donald" but have no matching data, IIR continues searching for any wild card characters to the right of the letters you type. So, for example, if the database contains a Donaldson, the IIR also finds that name.
  • the percent sign is a wild card. For example, if you want to find a name but are not sure if the spelling is Anderson or Andersen, you would type "Anders%n.”
  • the IIF search engine finds all records that match the other letters: Anderson, Andersen, Andersan, Andersun, Andersian (the wild card can represent more than one letter) .
  • the search engine would display the first available match and you could then use the Prev or Next buttons to scroll back and forth through additional records. Depending upon your ODE.C drivers, the search may or may not be case sensitive.
  • Modifying the Database includes adding, changing, or deleting information. Because the changes affect the record in the database, you must have privileges assigned by the Database Administrator.
  • Scripts are powerful tools that enable you to write a set of commands to automate for running repetitive tasks.
  • the Intelligent Information Router engine reads and executes the commands, which you write a special scripting language.
  • the scripts are made even more powerful by allowing you to use conditional logic.
  • the Simulator window 800 has two sections: script section 801 and output section 803 .
  • the script section in the upper portion of the window displays the script windows.
  • Each window serves as a script editor for writing and modifying your scripts.
  • this section 803 uses the output section 803 in the bottom of the window to view the results of testing your script commands. When you open the window, this section also contains initialization information for related files. If you do not see this information, the simulator is not properly initialized.
  • the simulator window 800 shown in FIGURE 9A has two scripts open. By default, the window opens with a blank page in the script window. When you save this script, the name of the script appears in the title bar of the ⁇ c ⁇ pt window.
  • the IIR allows you to write as many scripts as you need.
  • the IIR Script Editor is a simple ASCII text editor with a few enhanced options. With the IIR script editor, you can use formatting options (including fonts) and you can copy from other scripts, using standard Windows-based copy-and-paste techniques.
  • Opening a Script When you open the Simulator application, a blank window appears by default. You can use this window to write a new script, open additional new windows, or open existing scripts.
  • the general procedure for editing a script includes the steps below: 1. Place your cursor in a script window.
  • the formatting options are available from the Settings menu. Select Tab Stops to set the number of spaces to use for tabs. You may select from 1 to 16 spaces for tabs.
  • the tab settings affect only the active script. Select Editor Font to select a font for the script editor (see "Choosing Fonts" on page 19 for information. The font setting affects all script windows. Select Word Wrap to wrap text from one line to the next without a line break. The Word Wrap option affects only the active script.
  • the IIR script editor allows you to copy from other scripts by using Windows techniques for copy-and-paste.
  • the script editor does not support drag-and-drop copying. Please refer to your Windows documentation if you need help with these techniques.
  • Font choices apply to all scripts. You cannot maintain scripts with different fonts. IIR allows you to select True Type fonts for both screen and printer, although these fonts may produce undesirable results. Most True Type fonts are proportional, which means that each character uses a different amount of space. For example, the letter . uses less space than the letter w. In contrast, nonproportional fonts such as the Courier typeface are proportional. All these letters take up exactly the same space.
  • proportional fonts are considered easier to read. For formatting scripts, however, you cannot always vertically line up individual characters or lines of text if you use proportional fonts. If spacing is important to you, use a nonproportional font such as Courier, Terminal, MS Sans Serif, or MS Serif. Also, you can edit any IIR script in any ASCII text editor, but not all text editors can use proportional fonts. If you open a script in one of these editors, your spaces and alignments will change and font appearance may be unpredictable.
  • the Find What field 811 type the string that you want to replace. 4. In the Replace With field 813, type the new string. 5. (Optional) Check the Match Case to find only occurrences with exact match of uppercase and lowercase letters. The editor replaces these strings with the exact case of the string in the Replace With field. 6. Click the Find Next button to go to the string.
  • the dialog box does not close, allowing you to continue searching through the script text.
  • the IIR editor allows you to print your screen to paper or a file (ASCII) .
  • Your dialog window 820 may differ slightly from the one in FIGURE 9D, depending upon your printer driver. Please refer to your Windows documentation if you need help with using the Print dialog window.
  • the IIR uses the Windows print setup dialog.
  • the IIR uses the System (non-True Type, nonproportional) font. You can change this font. Please refer to "Choosing Fonts" for information about proportional versus nonproportional fonts and how they affect your scripts.
  • the IIR Simulator opens with a blank page in the screen editor. As shown by FIGURE 9A, you can use the editor to write a script on this blank page or open an existing script. Generally, your scripts fall into one of two categories: telephony (involving data received from an incoming call or data supplied by the caller dialing more digits) or non-telephony (scripts which do not test telephony calls) . The non-telephony calls probably represent a very small percentage of your scripts.
  • a new window 910 appears if you are simulating a telephony script. This window allows you to enter the information here to simulate the information that the route request would ordinarily provide for a live call.
  • VDN Enter the VDN that would normally handle calls for this script. If you do not use VDN in your script, you do not need to enter anything in this field.
  • CallmgDevice Enter the calling device that represents a call that would normally route through your script. If you do not use
  • UUI User-To-User Information
  • UserEnt eredCode Enter UserEnteredType that Type represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use UserEnteredType in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
  • UserEnt eredCode Enter UserEnteredlndicator that Indicator represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use UserEnteredlndicator in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
  • UserEnteredCode Enter UserEnteredVDN that CollectionVDN represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use UserEnteredVDN in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
  • LookAheadlnfo Enter LookaheadType that Type represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use LookaheadType in your script, you do not need to oopulate this field.
  • LookAheadlnfo Enter LookaheadMinutes that Minutes represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use Lookahead Hour in ycur script, you do not need to oopulate this field.
  • SourceVDN represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use
  • VDN Vector Directory Number
  • the VDN Administrator matches the scripts to the VDN and starts and stops the scripts on the production system.
  • a list box 932 displays all scripts that are set up for the system. You can click the column title (VDN or Script) to sort the list on that column.
  • the check box is empty and the script name appears as light gray. You may start a script with any of three methods. Click the Start button 943. Click the check box next to the VDN in the VDN Administrator window. Click the check box for Start Script Route Session the VDN Properties window.
  • the Refresh feature is helpful for determining which scripts are currently active or "started.” For example, if a script is accidentally deleted or stopped, this window reflects the status when refreshed.
  • the Delete command in the VDN Administrator window does not remove the script from the directory. Instead, it removes the script from the window only.
  • the Intelligent Information Router (IIR) system is designed to route calls in a call center environment.
  • the IIR is more intelligent and flexible than the existing ACD/PBX equipment, using the IIR Script as the mechanism through the system obtains the advanced intelligence and flexibility. To develop the IIR scripts, you can use the IIR
  • the IIR Simulator provides an interactive script development environment for testing and debugging of scripts without leaving the tool. If you have not already become familiar with the IIR Simulator tool, please read the sections on "Writing Scripts" (beginning on page 17) and “Testing and Implementing your Scripts" (page 23) before continuing.
  • the IIR is an intelligent adj unct router when viewed from the switch perspective.
  • the AT&T switch views the IIR as one of possibly several adjunct processors that will provide call routing direction back to the switch when requested.
  • the PBX/ACD can make rudimentary decisions about routing of calls through vector processing commands, it makes global routing decisi ons rather than customer- oriented routing decisions. For example, the PBX/ACD can determine routing based upon the number of agents available for a particular queue or time of day (for after-hours handling) . The routing capability stops there, however, as the PBX/ACD does not have access to customer specific data nor the operations available to process such data in the vectoring commands. Although this type of routing was an advanced feature a few years ago, today's call centers are demanding more customer-oriented routing capabilities which is where the IIR takes over.
  • the IIR By integrating the IIR to the PBX/ACD as an adj unct routing controller, an option available through the vectoring capabilities on the switch, the IIR easily performs customer-specific routing. Through sophisticated logic control combined with access to customer-specific databases, the IIR increases productivity and service by allowing customer-specific routing. Customer-specific routing can combine information such as ANI, customer-entered digits, or the VDN from which the caller is being routed to make determinations about the routing destination of the caller. For example, when the IIR receives the adjunct route request, it also receives the TSAPI route request message containing all pertinent information about the caller including ANI, originating VDN (DNIS), user-entered digits (DTMF collected), and many other fields. The IIR then uses this information to provide a database lookup and an eventual route based upon the logic in the IIR script.
  • ANI ANI
  • VDNIS originating VDN
  • DTMF collected user-entered digits
  • a call center manager needs to provide t hree l evel s of servi ce for the bank card customers . All bank card customers have been classified into three membership categories including Pla tinum, Gold, and Standard.
  • the customer classifi ca tion, along wi th the customers home phone, business phone, account number, current balance, account limi t , and other informa ti on are stored m the IIR customer database.
  • the call center manager designs mul tiple service queues for the different customer classification to provide the shortest wai ts along wi th the most experienced Customer Service Representa ti ves (CSRs) to the Pla tinum, w ie the standard customers receive the longest queue times and least experienced representatives .
  • CSRs ti ves
  • the switch sends all service calls to the IIR,
  • the IIR then performs a lookup on the ANI information. If it finds a match, it determines the customer classification and returns the route for the appropriate agent queue. If it does not find a match, the IIR performs a RouteMore command that sends the call back to the switch for collection of account number digits. Then, based upon these digits, the IIR performs a lookup, matches the customer classification, and routes the call to the correct agent queue.
  • the call center has transparently provided differentiated service without having to manage, publish, and maintain updates on different marketing numbers for different classes of service.
  • the call center administrator might decide to provide continuity to its Platinum members by always queuing them to a specific customer service agent, if available, while a customer related problem maintains an open state.
  • the IIR can then match the service, determine Platinum, and then route the call to a specific agent, based upon dynamic updates made by the customer service agents.
  • the IIR can determine not only if a specific agent is logged m, but also determine whether the agent is currently on an active call. By using combinations of priority and agent skills, the IIR could queue Platinum callers to a specific agent for preferential treatment.
  • the first integration issue to coisider is the component which actually controls whether the IIR is requested to determine a route: the PBX/ACD.
  • the mechanism on the PBX/ACD which invokes the IIR is a combination of the Vector Directory Number (VDN) and call vectoring.
  • VDN Vector Directory Number
  • Call vectoring is a limited "scripting" language on the switch which provides sequential handling of calls.
  • a standard part of the call vectoring language is the' adj unct route request step .
  • the adjunct route request step requires that the adjunct connect to the PBX/ACD via the ASAI link.
  • a system running telephony services for the AT&T DEFINITY G3 connects to the switch and serves as the "information link" between the IIR and the switch.
  • the switch sends a Route Reques t Service ce from the switch to the IIR via the telephony server.
  • This route request contains detailed information about the call that the IIR uses to route the call (which includes ANI, originating VDN, trunk, user-entered data [DTMF collected digits] , and other information) .
  • the IIR a client to the telephony server, receives the route request service event and associates the originating VDN with one of the IIR scripts. All of the information in the Route Request Service request is available within the IIR script to use in determining the appropriate route.
  • the IIR also has access to a customer database using one or several of the route request fields as a key to the database (i.e., it can match .ANI against the phone number in the database to determine a record match) .
  • the IIR Once the IIR has determined where to route the call, it issues a .Route Select Service message back to the PBX/ACD via the telephony server.
  • the Route Select Service message contains a destRoute field that the IIR fills in with the destination extension number (can represent VDN, agent login-id, etc.) .
  • the Route Select Service message can also be sent back with other fields used for application to application communications.
  • the general concept is fairly simple.
  • the AT&T switch requests a route to be performed through the adj unct route request step in call vectoring. This sends a Route Request Servi ce message to the IIR.
  • the IIR determines which IIR script to execute based upon the origin VDN and executes this script.
  • the script interacts with the customer database, applies logic to the information, and determines a route destination. This information is placed into the Route Select Servi ce message which returns to the call vector awaiting routing direction.
  • Operators include arithmetic, logical (comparison), assignment operators, and others.
  • Expressions include variable declarations, assignment expressions, and general expressions. The sections below explain how operators and expressions interact.
  • Variables (Declaration, Usage) Variables fall into two classifications in the IIR scripting language: local and gl obal . You must define all variables before referencing them m the script. Normally, you declare the variables near the top of a script, although you can declare them ust before the section where they are used.
  • Local variables require the keyword l ocal before the name of the variable. All local variables are variant nature: they can contain either numeric (integer or float) or string data. The information associated WLth a variable depends upon the type of data assigned to the variable. Normally, the assignment is to a numeric or string valued returned from one of the IIR functions.
  • Local variables are created for each scipt execution and only exist throughout the execution of the script. Future invocations of the same script for a different call will reinitialize variables to default values. Local variables can be declared one per line, or can be combined on a single line within the script as shown oy Example 5.
  • Example 5 local varOne local varTwo local varThree local varOne, varTwo, varThree
  • Variable names can consist of up to 32 characters, and can have a combination of numeric and alpha characters and mixed case. Good programming practice dictates comments for each variable or set of variables. Comments can exist on the same line as the declaration, and each is prefaced with a '#' (pound) sign. The value of a local variable cannot be referenced until it has been assigned a value within the script as shown by Example 6.
  • Example 6
  • #Th ⁇ s is the first variable m the script
  • #Th ⁇ s is the second variable, used for string manipulation #Th ⁇ s is the third variable ...
  • Gl obal variabl es are IIR specific variables that can be referenced or set in the script. These variables normally pass system information into the script (such as the script name, script execution id, or logging level for the particular script) .
  • the global variables are not global between scripts, but instead apply to the instance of the script being executed.
  • no global variables other than those defined by the system can be declared.
  • the global definition only provides access to pre-existing system global variables and is not a declaration of a new global variable.
  • Global variables are defined in the script by prefacing the variable name with the keyword gl obal as shown by Exampl e 7.
  • Example 7 global g nICRLLogLevel # Global variable to control logging level from this scr -pt global $0, $1 # $0 is the name of the script being executed # $1 is the telephony event hande used to obtain the call information
  • Example 8 show variables declared and then assigned to be used as constants throughout the application. Note that the variables have been declared in all capitals, which is not necessary but allows for differentiation throughout the script.
  • Example 8 local RET_0K # Valid return from all but handle allocations of 0 local DEFAULT_RTE # Default route to send caller to local AFTERHR_RTE # After hours default route
  • the binary arithmetic operators are (+, -, *, /) . You can apply these operators to any numeric variables in the script, basing the result upon whether the arguments are integers or float. If either variable being operated on is float, the result is a float. If both variables are integer in type, the result is integer. You may combine integer and float variables in arithmetic operations without casting.
  • Example 9 shows examples of code and the result:
  • This assignment operator can be used to assign numeric or string values to any variable. For example, the following assignments in Example 11 are all valid:
  • the variable contains the last value assigned to it.
  • Example 14 shows how an expression would be evaluated based upon the above rules of order.
  • Example 15 result numOne + (numTwo * numOne)
  • Strings can be output in both the simulation and production modes. The output the simulation mode is directed to the small output window in the lower portion of the simulator window. The output appears on the production system if the output is left intact in the script. The location of the output will be the ICRS Console session.
  • the commands for producing output to the debug window and ICRS console are print and println . Both commands take string arguments or expressions that evaluate to strings.
  • the print statement does not go to a new line after printing the string, but the p ⁇ ntin statement does.
  • the print and println functions are extremely valuable for debugging the simulator, but may result in cumbersome output to the screen on the production server. For this reason, consider commenting out all prmt/prmtln statements in the script after you are convinced of its correct operation.
  • the prmt/prmtln can be a useful tool if common debugging statements are removed by only outputting those errors or events considered to be critical in nature. This method provides a real-time monitor of critical errors that can easily be monitored for activity.
  • the logExpr function works exactly like the println function with one difference: the destination of the output.
  • the logExpr function's output is destined for the LOGn files in the ⁇ LOG subdirectory off of the simulator directory on the development system and off of the ⁇ ICRS directory on the production system.
  • Comments exist on any line of the script.
  • the pound sign ('#') precedes all comments and defines the remainder of the line as comments.
  • the '#' can be placed at the end of a valid line of logic or declarations, such as shown above in the variable declaration section. Any information following the comment declaration symbol serves as comment only on that line.
  • Blocks of statements fall sequentially m the scripting language into groups dictated by the beginning and end of constructs. No specific block begin/end symbol exists, but each construct (such as the if-else-endif) has self-defining block definitions.
  • the ⁇ statement block n> may contain any combination of statements including more if-el se-endif constructs. The endif portion of the statement must always be specified to terminate the block of statements being executed for the given expression.
  • Example 20 illustrates a three-way decision that would require an if-else-endif construct embedded within the else statement block.
  • the select statement shown by Table 12 tests whether an expression matches one of a number of constant integer or string values, and branches accordingly.
  • Each case s labeled by only one integer or string value constant. If a case matches the expression value, execution starts at that case and continues to the End Case statement. Each case value must be different, while the case labeled .Else is executed if none of the other cases are satisfied. Comparison values must either be integer values or strings (enclosed double quotes) and cannot be mixed within the same select statement. The El se case is optional. If this case is not present, and if none of the cases match, no action takes place.
  • Both the For-New and Do-Loop Until constructs provide a means of looping through multiple iterations of a statement block.
  • the For-Next construct is preferable when there is a known number of iterations for the loop, while the Do-Loop Until construct is preferable when looping until a specific condition is met.
  • Start and End indicate the beginning and ending increment value (for example, to loop from 1 to 20, Start would be 1 while .End would be 20) .
  • the Increment value represents the step to take between iterations, normally 1.
  • Example 21 shows a For-Next statement followed by an increment other than 1. This loop would iterate 5 times even though the start and end are 1 and 21.
  • the other looping construct is the Do -Loop Unti l construct.
  • the Do-Loop Until construct is better suited to those conditions where the loop will terminate based upon a condition rather than a set number of iterations.
  • IIR script could be as follows:
  • the actual logic varies for determining the appropriate route, depending on elements in the customer record and the specific routing task implemented.
  • This section groups the available IIR functions by process, lists all functions in that group by name, and provides a short description of the functions purpose. There are basically three logical groupings for the IIR functions. Tel ephony Event are those allowing read and write access to the Route Request/Select TSAPI events. Database Access are those functions providin ⁇ r access to the customer database. Miscellaneous Opera t i on are those functions supporting such features as date, t me, and string manipulation. Detailed information for each function is included in Section 5, Command Reference. Each function defined in the command reference includes a detailed description of the function along with examples of use for that function.
  • All of the telephony functions require that a "telephony handle" be passed to the call as the first parameter.
  • This "telephony handle” is obtained at the beginning of the script using the global variable '$1' .
  • the global variable '$1' represents the unique call identifier associated with this call and this instance of the running script.
  • the ' $1' global variable must be passed into the ICRLAtoi function to convert it to an integer handle. This operation needs to be done only once at the beginning of an IIR script to provide access to all of the telephony event information.
  • the telephony handle is valid from the point in the script that this call is made to the point where a RouteFinal or RouteUnknown is called. These functions inherently free the telephone handle in the system when they route the call. Any references to the telephone handle after invoking one of these functions will result m an error being returned.
  • GetAgentState functions obtain state information on specific ACD agents. For detailed information on a specific telephony functionn, look at the detailed entry for that function.
  • the general classification of database functions includes all functions used to access customer information from the server based database. All functions that access the database require a database handle. This database handle defines the current record location the database.
  • the database handle needs only to be created once at the beginning of the IIR script using the Crea teDBHandl e () function, and must be released before exiting the script using the DestroyDBHandle () function.
  • the following script segment in Example 23 shows the calls necessary to allocate the database handle and release it upon completion of the script.
  • the database handle is valid from the point in the script where the Crea teDBHandl e is called until the Des troyDBHandl e is called.
  • the database handle must be released before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper resource management.
  • the following Example 24 illustrates the .RunQuery function:
  • This line directs IIR to locate the first record in the database organized by accountNo (ascending order) where "accountNo" is greater than or equal to "123456789.” If the function returns 0, the query was successful. When a query has succeeded, the database handle represents the location of the record found.
  • the function MoveNextRecord moves the database handle to the next record in ascending order of the field used in the RunQuery invocation, in this case fi eldl .
  • This next record must use fieldl as well as f ⁇ el d2 matching criteria.
  • the MoveNextRecord and MovePrevi ousRecord operate according to the field index files stored with the database.
  • index files organize the field values in ascending order.
  • a fieldl index file might appear as:
  • the field index file has organized the values into ascending numerical order forfieldl .
  • Appendix C contains a summary of all database functions. This summary includes function types Database and all functions that can operate on a database, as well as a short description of operation an syntax.
  • the classification of miscellaneous functions includes access to time and date information from the system. All functions accessing the time information require a time handle.
  • the time handle need only be created once at the beginning of the IIR script using the CreateTimeHandle ( ) function, and must be released before exiting the script using the DestroyTimeHandle () function.
  • the following script segment in Example 27 shows the calls necessary to allocate the time handle and release it upon completion of the script.
  • nRet DestroyTi eHandle (hDBHandle)
  • the time handle is valid form the point the script where the Crea teTimeHandle is called until the DestroyTimeHandl e is called.
  • the time handle must be released before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper resource management. It is important to check the time handle returned from CreateTimeHandl e for a valid, non-zero value. A return value of 0 indicates that :he system was unable to allocate a time handle.
  • the user Once the time handle is obtained successfully, the user must use the GetCurrent Time function to actually update the instance time and date data. This call must be made each time the time and date information needs to be refreshed.
  • System functions are those inherent functions with the
  • ICRL prefix These functions currently include string manipulation functions such as ICRLStrLen .
  • a standard script includes access to information from the Route Request message, comparison of this data to that stored in the customer database, and finally a determination of where to route the call.
  • the following call center scenario will be helpful in understanding the script example.
  • a credi t card issuer wants to take away the laborious task of manually verifying new credi t cards issued through the use of cagents .
  • the issuer determines that a match on the caller 's ANI (Automatic Number Identification, or simply put , the number from which they are calling) to the phone number in the customer da tabase is suffici ent for verificationti on purposes, and can he a utoma ted using the IIR.
  • ANI Automatic Number Identification
  • the IIR recei ves the adj unct route request , performs a lookup on the ANI information , and, if a ma tch lsvfound, updates the customer 's record to reflect verification on the card. If a match is not found, the IIR uses the RouteMore capabili ty to prompt the caller to enter other verification tion data (social securi ty number, birth da te, etc. ) .
  • Example 28 on the following page represents the IIR script that would handle these requirements. The example breaks down "blocks" of the script, A through G. The text following the example defines important issues for each section and describes the logic associated with that section.
  • the global variables $1 and $0 are system-defined parameters that exist for every script execution. The variables are accessible by a script through the gl obal declaration: global $1 , $0.
  • the variable $1 is a text string containing the call identifier assigned to it by the IIR when the Route Request message is received. This identifier obtains the telephony handle later in the script (the teLephony handle is simply a numeric version of this identifier) .
  • the variable $0 is the script name. The script can use this variable for output to identify the script related to errors or diagnostics. Items to note m this block include the declaration of variables to be used as constants (all variables defined with all capitals) . These variables appear n uppercase the example to make them easy to identify as constants in the script, but uppercase is not required.
  • Block B Variable Initialization / Resource Handle
  • This block begins with variable initialization and defines the "constants, " which is a good coding practice for maintainability.
  • the constants defined here are used to compare against return values from functions, as well as defining standard route values used throughout the script. Also notice the use of the semicolon between commands, allowing multiple commands to be placed on the same line.
  • the second half of this block deals with obtaining handles to the database and telephony event information.
  • the telephony event handle is obtained by converting the call identifier ($1 ) to a numeric value.
  • the database handle is created by invoking Crea teDBHandl e () .
  • Block C Validate Resource Handles This block describes the validation of the resource handles obtained (telephony and database, this case) .
  • the script attempts to perform a final routing of the call to an extension on the switch which might be an ACD queue for general call handling.
  • the RouteFinal is preceded by the SetRouteSel ected and
  • Route Select message to send to the switch. If these two functions are not called preceding the RouteFinal , the call will not be routed successfully.
  • the SetRouteSelected places the destination extension into the message while the
  • This block displays the database query and the
  • RouteMore function which are used when the initial query fails.
  • the purpose of the RunQuery call is to determine a match between the customer's ANI (obtained via GetCallmgDevice) and the "PhoneNo " field in the database. The result of the operation will be zero (0) if a match is found. In this example, if the return from the query is non-zero (no record matches the caller's ANI) , a secondary method verifies the account.
  • the secondary method attempts to match on social security number, which requires prompting and subsequent DTMF input by the caller.
  • the RouteMore command gives control back to a VDN on the switch, wh ⁇ althoughe maintaining position in the current IIR script.
  • SetRouteSelected h TelHandl e, QUERY_SSN
  • the second RunQuery operation in th.s block uses information from the Route Request message as a result of the VDN that prompted for SSN digits.
  • This example uses Roul eMore only once, but the number of times that the IIR script can pass control back to a VDN on the switch is unlimited, as long as the VDN to which con:rol is passed performs an adjunct route at some point in its processing.
  • Block E - Update DB Record / Route Final This block handles the case where either of the two database queries succeeded performed in Block D above. In this case the customer's record is updated to reflect the verification of the account, and the user is transferred to a VDN that notifies the caller of the verification.
  • the SetStringFi eldVal ue function sets the Veri fi ca ti on field in the database for the customer to COMPLETE. After modifying this field, the record is updated m the database using the Upda teRecord function on . If the update is successful, the call is routed to the VDN that plays a message notifying the caller of the successful validation, otherwise the caller is sent to the FAIL_RTE extension for general call handling.
  • This block is always executed, just as the creation of the database and telephony handles is m Block B. At this point, all resources allocated in the script must be released.
  • the DestroyDBHandl e function releases the database handle. The h TelHandl e is automatically released when a RouteFinal operation is encountered.
  • the ClearRecord function removes a record in the database that has been located through the -RunQuery or MoveNextRecord/MovePreviousRecord functions.
  • destVariable ClearRecord (hDBHandle) Part Description destVariable Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call. hDBHandle Variable that receives the allocated database handle
  • This function returns -5008.
  • This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Some of the more common errors returned by Btrieve are covered in the IIR trouble shooting guide.
  • the ClearRecord function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the Crea teDBHandle function, and a "current" record being defined through the RunQuery function call.
  • the CreateDBHandle function allocates a database handle from the resource manager, and provides the means to access and update database related information through the database related functions.
  • this function returns an integer value of 0 if the resource manager is unable to allocate a database handle.
  • the Crea teDBHandl e function provides the access mechanism for all database related functions.
  • the CreateDBHandl e function is closely related to another of the database functions, Des troyDBHandl e .
  • the DestroyDBHandl e function must be called before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper maragement of the database handle resources.
  • the allocation of a ⁇ atabase handle does not locate a record within the database.
  • the RunQuery function Before performing any database record reads, updates, or deletions, the RunQuery function must be called successfully.
  • the CreateTimeHandle function allocates a time handle from the resource manager, and provides the means to access time/date related information through the Get time/date related functions.
  • this function returns a value of 0 if the resource manager cannot allocate a time handle.
  • the CreateTimeHandl e function provides the access mechanism for all time and date related functions such as GetHour, GetDayOf Month , etc.
  • the Crea teTimeHandle function is closely related to two of the other time resource functions, DestroyTimeHandle, and GetCurrent Time .
  • the DestroyTimeHandl e function must be called before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper management of the time handle resources.
  • a call to GetCurrentTime after obtaining the time handle is necessary to obtain/update the time and date related information. All of the time/date Get... functions obtain their information based upon the most recent call to GetCurrent Time .
  • the DestroyDBHandle function frees a database handle back to the resource manager. This function is paired with the Crea teDBHandl e function, which allocates the database handle at the beginning of an IIR script.
  • this function returns 0.
  • this function returns an integer value of -5008.
  • the DestroyDBHandle function must be called before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper management of the database handle resources, if a database handle has been allocated using the Crea teDBHandle function before that point in the script.
  • the DestroyTimeHandle function frees a time handle back to the resource manager. This function is paired with the Createrimeifanc.Je function which allocates the time handle at the beginning of an IIR script.
  • This function returns a value of 0 if successful; -5008 if invalid.
  • the DestroyTimeHandle function must be called before you exit the IIR script to ensure proper management of the time handle resources if a time handle has been allocated using the CreateTimeHandle function before that point the script.
  • the GetAgentAvailable function returns either true or false (1,0) depending upon the state of the agent information obtained through the QueryAgentSta te call.
  • the agent available state is a combination of the agent state and the agent talk state where the agent is ready and the talk state is idle.
  • Syntax destVariable GetAgentAvailabl e ( h TelHandl e )
  • This function returns an integer value that represents the available state of the agent defined in a previously executed QueryAgentState call. If the telephony handle is invalid, this function returns - 4001. Remarks
  • This function is dependent upon the agent information obtained in the QueryAgentSta te function call. This function will return an error if the QueryAgentSt te function has not been called with to obtain the agent state information for the specific agent.
  • the GetAgentState function returns the "ready" state of a given agent based upon the agent information obtained through the QueryAgentState call. This represents the agentState field from the Query Agent State Service message.
  • This function returns an integer value that represents the agent "ready" state base upon the most recently executed QueryAgentSta te call. If the telephony handLe is invalid, this function returns - 4001.
  • This function is dependent upon the agent information obtained in the QueryAgentSta te function call. This function will return an error if the QueryAgentSta te function has not been called with to obtain the agent state information for the specific agent.
  • agState GetAgentState ( hTelhandle )
  • the GetAgentTalkState function returns the talk state of an agent based upon the agent information obtained through the QueryAgentSta te call. This represents the talkState field from the Query Agent State Service message.
  • This function returns an integer value that represents the agent talk state base upon the most recently executed QueryAgentSta te call. If the telephony handle is invalid, this function returns - 4001.
  • This function is dependent upon the agent information obtained in the QueryAgentSta te function call. This function will return an error if the QueryAgentSta te function has not been called with to obtain the agent state information for the specific agent.
  • the agents talkSta te is only defined when the agentSta te is AG_READY. See GetAgentSta te for details on agentState.
  • nRet QueryAgentState( hTelHandle, "3600", SKILL_HUNT)
  • agState GetAgentState ( hTelhandle )
  • the GetAgentWorkMode function returns the work mode of a given agent based upon the agent information obtained through the QueryAgentSta te call. This represents the workMode field from the Query Agent State Service message.
  • This function returns an integer value that represents the agent work mode based upon the most recently executed QueryAgentSta te call. If the telephony handle is invalid, this function returns - 4001.
  • This function is dependent upon the agent information obtained in the QueryAgen tSta t e func ti on call. This function will return an error if the QueryAgentSta te function has not been called with to obtain the agent state information for the specific agent.
  • agTalkState GetAgentTalkState ( hTelHandle )
  • the GetAscTime function returns a string containing the current date and time in the format "Thu Oct 12 09:00:40 1995" based upon the date and time of the last call to GetCurrentTime in the IIR script.
  • This function returns a string expression that represents the calling device extension/number. If the return value is a zero length string, no callmgDevi ce information was received for this call. If the telephony handle is not valid, this function returns the string "NULL_POINTER" .
  • the callmgDevice field in the Route Request Service message is an optional component of this message, therefore it may not exist for each call.
  • This field, for calls incoming over PRI facilities is the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) value.
  • the callmgDevi ce field is mutually exclusive with the trunk field accessed through the GetTrunk function. This means one or the other of callmgDevi ce or trunk are available in the message, but never both.
  • trunkID GetTrunk( hTelHandle ) println
  • the inbound trunk group ID "+ trunkID endif
  • the GetCurrentTime function sets or refreshes the current date and time associated with the specified time handle. All Get... time and date functions receive information based upon the last invocation of this function.
  • this function If successful, this function returns 0; if invalid time handle, this function a value of -5008.
  • the GetDayOfMonth function returns an integer representing the current day of the month (1 -31) based upon the most recent call to GetCurren t Time within the script.
  • this function returns an integer defining the current day of the month. If invalid, the function returns -5008.
  • Crea teTimeHandle and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrentTime before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurren t Time the script.
  • the GetDayOfWeek function returns an integer representing the current day of the week (1-7) ; the base or first day (1) being Sunday, based upon the most recent call to GetCurrentTime within the script.
  • this function returns an integer defining the current day of the week; if invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
  • this function returns an integer defining the current day of the year. For the case of an invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
  • this function returns an integer defining the current daylight savings time state. For the case of an invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
  • Crea teTimeHandle and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrentTime before calling this function.
  • the information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurrent Time m the script.
  • GetHour The GetHour function returns an integer representing the current hour based upon the most recent call to GetCurrentTime within the script.
  • this function returns an integer defining the current hour. For the case of ai invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
  • Crea teTimeHandl e and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrent Time before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurren t Time in the script.
  • the GetlncomingUUIPata function returns the user-to- user information data.
  • the type of user-to-user information obtained through the GetlncommgUUIType , indicates the presence of user-to-user information (UUI) including the UUI Data.
  • This function returns a string value that represents the user-to-user information data. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns the string "NULL_POINTER" .
  • the userinfo.type accessed through the function
  • GetlncomingUUIType determines whether or not any user-to- user information actually exist. If the userinfo type is none (-1), there is no user-to-user information for this call.
  • All userinfo parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements.
  • the specific field in the Route Request message (Version 2) is private data ATTUserToUserlnfo . da ta , val ue .

Abstract

An intelligent information router system (42) comprising a telephony controller (58) coupled to a private branch exchange (14) through a link interface (40). The telephony controller (58) may communicate with a handle manager (64) and a script interpreter engine (65). The telephony controller (58) may receive information from the link interface (40) regarding telephone calls being placed to the private branch exchange (14). The telephony controller (58) may initiate actions with the script interpreter engine (65) that access information stored in a database through a database controller (66). In response to action of the script interpreter engine (65), the telephony controller (58) may instruct the private branch exchange (14) to route the call to an appropriate location within a company depending on the information received by the private branch exchange (14) through automatic transmission of data or interaction with the calling party.

Description

INTELLIGENT INFORMATION ROUTING SYSTEM AND METHOD
TECHNICAL FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates in general to the fields of telecommunications and data processing and more particularly to an improved intelligent information routing system and method.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Advances in interactive voice response systems and private branch exchanges have allowed for the development of systems which can interact with calling parties to solicit information in an automated fashion. In addition, modern database technology can allow for the characterization of a population in extremely fine detail. Finally, with the development of computer telephony interfaces, private branch exchanges and other private switching systems can be accessed and, m part, controlled by efficient and inexpensive personal computers and mini¬ computers. While all of these building blocks are m place, little work has been done to integrate these facilities to allow the use of the vast amounts of information stored in a company's database to be used to control the access to the company's staff through the telecommunications interfaces. Accordingly, need has arisen for a system which responds in an intelligent fashion to information provided by a telecommunications system or other data provided by other systems to perform tasks in an automated fashion responsive to the information received.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In accordance with the teachings of the present invention, an intelligent information router system and method are provided that substantially eliminate or reduce problems associated with prior systems and methods. According to one embodiment of the present invention, an intelligent information router system is provided that comprises a telephony controller which is coupled to a private branch exchange through a link interface. The telephony controller communicates with a handle manager and a script interpreter engine. Telephony controller receives information from the link interface regarding telephone calls being placed to the private braich exchange. Telephony controller initiates actions within the script interpreter engine that, in turn, access information stored in a database through a database controller. Responsive to the action of the script interpreter engine, the telephony controller can then instruct the private branch exchange to route the call to an appropriate location within a company depending upon the information received by the PBX through automatic transmission of data or interaction with the calling party.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
A more complete understanding of the teachings of the present invention may be acquired by referring to the accompanying FIGURES in which like reference numbers indicate like features and wherein: FIGURE 1 is a schematic block diagram of the environment in which an intelligent information router system of the present invention may operate;
FIGURE 2 is a schematic block diagram of the internal architecture of the intelligent information router system of the present invention;
FIGURES 3a, 3b and 3c and FIGURES 4a and 4b are flow diagrams illustrating the operation of various components within the intelligent information router of the present invention, illustrate the screens, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention;
FIGURE 5 illustrates a block diagram of a specific embodiment of the intelligent information router system of the present invention;
FIGURE 6a-g illustrate the installation screens, options and operations of a user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention; FIGURE 7 illustrates the set-up screen, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention;
FIGURE 8 illustrates agent station screens, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention;
FIGURES 9a-d illustrate simulator screens, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention; and
FIGURES lOa-e illustrate testing screens, options and operations of the user interface to the intelligent information router system of the present invention. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
FIGURE 1 is a schematic block diagram of a telecommunications system 10 which comprises a telephony server 12 which is coupled through a computer telephone interface link to a private branch exchange 14. Private branch exchange 14 is coupled through a plurality of trunk lines to a central office 16. In addition, private branch exchange 14 is connected to telephones 16, 18 and 20 within agent stations 22, 24 and 26, respectively. Agent stations 22, 24 and 26 also comprise agent work stations 28, 30 and 32.
The agent stations 28, 30 and 32 are coupled to a local area network 34. An administration workstation 36 is also connected to local area network 34. In addition, the telephony server 12 is connected to local area network 34 through a network interface 38.
The telephone server 12 is connected to the CTI link through a link interface 40. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the PBX may comprise a G-3 PBX manufactured by AT&T. Under this embodiment, the CTI link would comprise an AT&T ASAI link. The link interface 40 would comprise an ISDN-BRI board within the telephony server 12. Under this embodiment, the telepnony server 12 may comprise a Pentium-class personal computer running the Novell netware telephony server system.
The telephony server provides a platform for an intelligent information router system 42. The architecture of the intelligent information router system 42 will be described more completely with reference to FIGURE 2. However, in general, calls are received from central office 16 to virtual device numbers within PBX 14. The PBX 14 then generates route requests which are transferred via the CTI link to the intelligent information router 42 within telephony server 12. The intelligent information router 42 processes the route request and generates a route select or a request for further information which is transferred back to the PBX 14 through the CTI link. In some circumstances, the PBX 14 can request information from the calling party using an interactive voice response engine 44 resident on PBX 14. The PBX 14 can solicit customer information using the IVR engine 44 on its own or in response to a request for further information from the intelligent information router 42. Eventually, the intelligent information router 42 will finish processing the route request and will instruct the PBX 14 to route the call to one of the particular agent stations 22, 24 or 26. In addition, information is transmitted via the network interface 38 and the LAN 34 to database facilities 46, 48 and 50 within agent workstations 28, 30 and 32, respectively. In this manner, using information about the calling party, including an automatic number identification information or information which is solicited using the IVR engine 44, the intelligent information router 42 can access a database using predefined scripts to route the call to an appropriate agent and to supply that agent with information about the calling party. In this manner, for example, a sales organization can route a call to the particular agent assigned to a particular client and present the agent with a recent history of sales activity for that client before the agent says the first word to the client.
The administration workstation 36 is used to create new scripts using a simulator system 52. In addition, the database managed by the intelligent information router 42 is also accessed and administered using a database administration system 54 within the administration workstation 36. The intelligent information router 42 is also administered, maintained and modified using a router administration client 56 within the administration workstation 36. As will be discussed herein, great care is taken in the architecture of the intelligent information router 42 to allow for the alteration of scripts used by the router 42 while the system is active. In addition, the database accessed by the router 42 and the agent stations 22, 24 and 26 and the administration workstation 36 is constantly changing. Mechanisms are also in place within the architecture of the intelligent information router 42 to allow for these changes to take olace without interfering from the current activity of the system. FIGURE 2 is a schematic block diagram which illustrates the architecture of the intelligent information router 42. As discussed previously, the information router 42 receives route requests and transmits requests for information and route select data to the PBX 14 through a link interface 40. The link interface 40 uterfaces with a telephony controller 58 for all telephony related events, data transfers and instructions.
The information router system 42 recei/es other non- telephony related information as well as database accesses and updates through an external data manager 60 which is coupled to the local area network 34 through the network interface 38. Administration of the telephony controller and the remainder of the information rou:er system 42 occurs through the operation of a router administration server 62 which is also coupled to the network interface 38 and communicates with the router administration client 56 within administration workstation 36 through the communication path formed by network interface 38 and local area network 34.
Events and processes which are managed and performed by the information router 42 are organized and monitored using a handle manager 64. The handle manager 64 communicates with the external data manager 60, the telephony controller 58 and a script interpreter engine 64 and a database controller 66. In general, all telephone calls that are being handled, data which has been accessed and retrieved, scripts which have been initiated, database accesses which have been initiated, files which have been retrieved, strings which have been parsed, and the like, are organized and monitored by creating handles associated with each of these objects. The handle manager 64 maintains a list of all active handles and is accessed by the remaining components of the information router 42 to insure the duplicative effort is not created. In addition, as will be discussed herein, through the careful operation of the handle manager and the remaining components, the system is allowed to operate constantly while scripts are updated, database information is changed, or any other components are altered.
The script interpreter engine 65 uses a script storage system 68 for the storage of the data files which comprise the script of activities to be performed by the system 42. The script interpreter engine also comprises a time utility 70, a string parse utility 72 and a file I/O utility 74. The time utility 70 is invoked to monitor and commence time-based events. The string parse utility 72 is used to perform string searches and to parse through alphanumeric and character-based data. The file I/O utility 74 is invoked to access data in files within script storage system 68 and other storage systems accessible to the system 42.
The database controller 66 accesses a database engine 76 which in turn accesses physical database storage system 78. The database engine 76 may comprise any suitable database such as a BTrieve-based system.
In operation, an external event is received by the router system 42 through the telephony controller 58 or the external data manager 60. As described previously, external telephony events are processed by the telephony controller 58 and all other external events are processed by the external data manager 60. In the telephony application described previously, a telephone call received by the PBX 14 creates a route request event which is received by the telephony controller 58. This route request is then processed by first creating a telephony handle using the handle manager 64. The script interpreter engine 65 is then invoked to process the call. The processing of the call may result in a variety of actions by the system 42, including a request for more information from the PBX 14 or an access to the database engine 76 to retrieve information about the calling party or the call. Finally, the telephony event may result in the telephony controller 58 forwarding a route selection command to the PBX instructing the PBX where to route the particular call.
The architecture shown in FIGURE 2 is r.ot limited to the telephony application described previously. For example, other events can be input into the system through the external data manager 60 to similarly cause scripts to be invoked through the script interpreter engine 65. For example, other application programs can coirmunicate with the external data manager 60 using direct data exchange mechanisms or network data exchange mechanisms. These data transfers to the external data manager 60 can cause scripts to be invoked. For example, in one application, a separate application program may monitor a particular stock price. The application program can then cause a data transmission to the external data manager 60 when a particular threshold value for the stock is reached. A script could then be invoked using the script interpreter engine 65 to issue a buy or sell command that can be passed out through the external data manager 60 to a separate program that interfaces with a purchasing or selling agent in that stock.
According to another embodiment of the present invention, the same system 42 is also present in each of the agent stations 22, 24 and 26, and particularly the agent work stations 28, 30 and 32, respectively. According to this embodiment, when a particular telephone call is routed to the agent station telephone 16, 18 and 20, a network message informing the agent's workstations 28, 30 and 32 is also routed simultaneously. The network message is received by an external data manager 60 within, for example, the agent station 28. This network message causes a script within the agent workstation 28 to be invoked. This script could cause certain information to be displayed to the agent on the workstation 28. In addition, particular records within the database engine 76 may be retrieved. In this manner, the agent working at agent workstation 28 will simultaneously receive the call on the telephone 16 and will view the selected database information about the client-calling party simultaneously with the call ringing or even before the call rings. As discussed previously, the administration workstation 36 functions to manage the operation of system 42. The simulator system 52 comprises a complete implementation of the system 42 within administration workstation 36. All of the components shown in FIGURE 2 with the exception of the link interface 40 are present within administration workstation 36 and simulator 52. Link interface 40 is replaced with a graphical user interface to the administration displayable on the administration workstation 36. In this way, new scripts can be developed and tested using the simulator 52.
The database administration system 54 s used by the administrator working at administration workstation 36 to access the database engine 76 and the database storage 78 remotely. These accesses are routed throucrh the network interface 38 and the router administration server 62. This same communication path is also used by the administration workstation 36 to download new scripts to the script interpreter engine 65 and the physical script storage facility 68.
The process of the present invention for routing a call using the intelligent information router 42 will now be described. It will be understood by those skilled in the art, however, that other types of information or data can be routed within the scope of the present invention with the intelligent information router 42.
As shown by FIGURE 3A, the method of the present invention for routing a call begins at step 100 and proceeds to step 105. At step 105, a route request is received by the telephony controller 58 from the link interface 40. As previously described, the telephony controller 58 continuously monitors the link interface 40 for route requests. In response to the route request, the telephony controller 58 determines at step 110 if a telephony handle exists for the route request.
The preferred method for determining whether a telephony handle exists is shown by FIGURE 3B. However, those skilled in the act will understand that other methods of determining whether a telephone handle exists for a route request may be employed in accordance with the teaching of the present invention. As shown by FIGURE 3B, the preferred method is a multi-step process that begins at step 250 and proceeds to step 255. At step 255, the telephony controller 58 creates a prototype telephony handle for the route request. Next, at step 260, the telephony controller 58 accesses the list of existing telephony handles stored on the handle manager 64. At step 265, the telephony controller 58 receives the existing telephony handles from the handle manager m binary sequence. The binary number of each telephony handle is determined by the numeric value of the handle's Call ID. Next, at step 270, the telephony controller 58 compares the binary number of the existing telephony handles received from the handle manager 64 with the binary number of the prototype handle created for the route request. If the binary number of an existing handle is the same as the binary of the prototype handle, then a telephony handle already exists for the route request. However, if no existing telephony handle has the same binary value as the prototype handle, then a telephony handle does not exist for the route request and one must be created. Returning to FIGURE 3A, if a telephony handle does not exist for the route request, the NO branch of decisional step 110 leads to step 115. At step 115, the telephony controller 58 creates a telephony handle for the route request. Next, at step 120, the telephony controller 58 assigns the telephony handle a reference count of 1. The telephony controller 58 then stores the telephony handle to the handle manager 64 at step 125. The telephony handle is stored m the handle manager 64 in accordance with its binary value. This is accomplished by calling the existing handles stored in binary sequence and locating the appropriate position for the new telephony handle. Step 125 leads to step 130 wherein the telephony handle is used to determine a script file name.
Returning to decisional step 110, if a telephony handle already exists for the route requ sts, the YES branch of decisional step 110 also leads to step 130 wherein the telephony handle is used to determine a script file name. At step 130, the telephony controller 58 determines a script file name for the route request. The telephony controller 58 determines the script file name by using the VDN of the route request, which is packaged with the telephony handle. Next, at step 135, the telephony controller 58 uses the script file name to call a script API to the script interpretation engine 65.
Step 135 leads to decisional step 140. At decisional step 140, the script interpretation engine 65 determines if a script handle exists for the script file name. The preferred process for determining whether a script handle exists for the script file name is shown by FIGURE 3C. However, those skilled in the art will understand that other methods may be used within the scope of the present invention to determine whether a script handLe exists. As shown by FIGURE 3C, the preferred method of determination of whether a script handle exists is a multi-step process that starts at step 300 and proceeds to step 305.
At step 305, the script interpretation engine 65 creates a prototype script handle. Next, at step 310, the script interpretation engine 65 accesses the list of existing script handles stored on the handle manager 64. At step 315, the script interpretation engine 65 receives existing script handles from the handle manager 65 in binary sequence. The binary number of a script handle is determined by the value of the script file name. At step 270, the script interpretation engine 65 compares the binary number of each existing script handle with the binary number of the prototype script handle. If the binary number of an existing script handle matches the binary number of the prototype script handle, the script handle already exists. However, if the binary number of the prototype script handle does not match the binary number of an existing script handle, the script handle does not exist and one must be created. Returning to FIGURE 3A, if a script handle does not exist, the NO branch of decisional step 140 leads to step 145. At step 145, the script interpretation engine 65 creates a script handle. Next at step 150, an executable file is created for the script handle. Proceeding to step 155, the script interpretation engine 65 assigns the script handle a reference count of 1. The script interpretation engine 65 then stores the script handle to the handle manager leads to 64 at step 160. Stop 160 leads to step 200. Returning to decisional step 140, if the script handle already exists, the YES branch of decisional step 140 leads to decisional step 165. At decisional step 165, the script interpretation engine determines if the existing script handle is for the most recent version of the script. Whether the script handle is for the most recent version of the script is determined by comparing the date of the prototype script handle that was created at step 140 with the date of the existing script handle. If the script handle is not for the most recent version of the script, the NO branch of decisional step 165 leads to step 170.
Proceeding to step 185, the script interpretation engine replaces the outdated script handle with the new script handle. However, the old script handle is not deleted. Rather, at step 190, the old script handle is retrieved to ensure that it is not deleted until all current calls using that script handle are complete. Next, at step 195, the reference count of the olc script handle is decreased by 1. As a result, when all calls currently using the old script handle are complete, the reference count of the old script handle will become 0. Thereafter, the old script then will be automatically deleted by the handle manager. Accordingly, the present invention allows scripts to be updated and immediately used for calls received thereafter without interruption of current calls using an old script.
After a script handle has been created or an existing script handle is retrieved, the process proceeds to step 200 wherein the script interpretation engine 65 increases the reference count of the script handle b/ 1. Next, at step 205, the script interpretation engine 65 determines a route select based on the script. At step 210, the script interpretation engine 65 sends the route select to the telephony controller 58, which forwards the route select to the PBX via the link interface 40. The PBX then routes the call in accordance with the route select.
After a call is completed, the telephony controller 58 decreases the reference count of the script handle by 1 at step 215. Accordingly, when a script handle is in use, it has a reference count greater than 1. When a script handle is idle, it has a reference count equal to 1. When a script handle is outdated and thereafter becomes idle, its reference count drops to 0. Script handles having a value of 0 are automatically deleted by the handle manager 64. Script handles having a value of 1 are known by the system to be idle. Script handles having a value of 2 or greater are known to be in use and, even if outdated, will not have the reference count reduced to 0 and thereby be deleted until the current use is completed.
In another aspect, the present invention provides dynamic extensibility in executing scripts. As shown by FIGURE 4A, the preferred script execution process of the present invention begins at step 350 and proceeds to step 355. At step 355, an external module is loaded. Next, at step 360, a function of the module is bound in the script. Thereafter, the script will execute the function when called at step 365.
The preferred process carried out by the script when called is shown by FIGURE 4B. The process starts at step 400 and proceeds to step 405. At step 405 the script interpretation engine 65 places each individual parameter of the function directly onto the hardware stack. At step 410, the script interpretation engine 65 marks the position of the hardware stack. This will enable the script interpretation engine 65 to later clear the stack. Next, at step 415, the script calls the external function without parameters, which are aLready on the hardware stack. At step 420, the bound function is executed on the parameters on the hardware stack. Next, at decisional step 425, the script interpretation engine 65 determines if the external function cleared the stack. If the function failed to clear the stack, the NO branch of decisional step 425 leads to step 430. At step 430, the script interpretation engine clears the stack. Returning to decisionaJ step 425, if the external function cleared the stack, the YES branch of decisional step leads to step 435 wherein the process is complete.
Example 1 shows script including code that loads, binds and calls an external function in accordance with the dynamic extensibility of the present invention is provided for the benefit of the reader as part of the specification at the end of the description. In the exemplary script, the module "User32" is loaded and the "LmeTo" function is bound to the new script word "LmeTo". The function takes three parameters that are each integers. Accordingly, the parameters will be loaded directly onto the hardware stack and left for manipulation by the function. Thus, when the function is called, the function will directly manipulate the parameters on the stack to carry out the desired operation.
Example 1 global g_nICRLLogLevel as integer local hUser32Handle, hGDI32Handle local hDeskTop as integer local hPen, hPen2, hOldPen as integer local rad as integer local ex, cy, ICX, icy as integer local pi, angle, x, y as double local ntimes as integer local RAND_MAX as double local ltime as integer g_nICRLLogLevel = 0 hUser32Handle = LoadModule ("user32", "user32") hGID32Handle = LoadModule ("gdi32", "gdι32") if (hUser32Handle <> 0 and hGDI32Handle <> 0) then if (BindFunction (hUser32Handle, "MessageBoxA", "MessageBox", "INT", 4) ) then println "Bind on MessageBoxA succeeded ! " else println "Bind on MessageBoxA failed !" endif
BindFunction(hUser32Handle, "wpπntfA", "sprmtf", "INT", -1, 0, 1000) BindFunction(hUser32Handle, "GetDC", "GetDC", "INT", 1) BindFunction (hUser32Handle, "ReleaseDC", "ReleaseDC", "INT", 2)
BindFunction (hGDI32Handle, "LineTo", "LmeTo", "INT", 3) BindFunction(hGDI32Handle, "MoveToEx", "MoveToEx", "INT", 4)
BindFunction (hGDI32Handle, "CreatePen", "CreatePen", "INT", 3)
BindFunction (hGDI32Handle, "SelectObject", "SelectObject", "INT", 2)
BindFunction (hGDI32Handle, "DeleteObn ect", "DeleteObject", "INT", 1) hdesktop = -1 hdesktop = GetDC (0) println "hdeskcop == " + hdesktop hPen = CreatePe (0, 3, OxOOOOOOff) hPen2 = CreatePen (0, 3, OxOOOOffOO) hOldPen = SelectObject (hdesktop, hPen) rad = 150 pi = 3.141592654 RAND MAX = 0x7fff lti e = time(O) println "timed == " + ltime srand (ltime) rand( ) ex = ConvertToDouble (rand ( ) ) cy = ConvertToDouble (rand () ) ex = (ex * 1000) / RAND_MAX cy = (cy * 700) / RAΝD_MAX
# icx = ConvertToInt (ex)
# icy = ConvertToInt (cy) for ntimes = 0 to 10 step 1 println "ring no. " + ntimes if ( (ntimes / 2) == ( (ntimes + 1) / 2) ) then SelectObject (hdesktop, hPen) else
SelectObject (hdesktop, hPen2) end if for angle = 0.0 to 2*pi step pi/60.0 x = rad * sin (angle) + ex y = rad * cos (angle) + cy if (angle == 0.0) then MoveToEx (hdeskTop, ConvertToInt (x)
ConvertToInt (y) , 0) end if
LineTo (hdesktop, ConvertToInt (x) , ConvertToInt (y) next next
SelectObject (hdesktop, hOldPen) ReleaseDC (0, hdesktop)
DeleteObject (hPen) DeleteObject (hPen2)
# MessageBox(0, "Cool ! ! !", "Cool ! !", 0) end if In addition to the detailed description of set forth above, Design and User's Guide documentation directed toward a specific embodiment of the present invention (Intelligent Information Router) is provided below. This document is provided for the convenience of the reader and does not limit the scope of the invention to that embodiment.
Design Document for Intelligence Information Router Intelligent Information Router (IIR) Introduction:
This document presents the design of AnswerSoft, Inc.'s Intelligent Information Router. The design description begins with an overview of the IIR design and continues with detailed descriptions of the subcomponent units which implement the design. This document ends with a closure section discussing extensibility issues of IIR for the future.
The IIR design is based on two overriding principles. First, extensibility is of utmost importance. Second, field maintenance requires that field upgrades be easy and cost effective to implement. This can mean, among other things that field upgrades should be possible without stopping the system. To support these requirements, the design uses a multiple module single level communication bus.
Four mam components, shown in FIGURE 5 and explained below, make up the IIR: the Intelligent Call Routing Language scripting engine (ICRL), the Intelligent Call Routing Telephony module (ICRTEL), the Intelligent Call Routing Customer Database module (ICRDB) and the Intelligent Call Routing General Utilities module (ICRMSC) . Each module is responsible for the creation of information sets (data objects) which pertain to the module's subject. The information sets are created on behalf of ICRL. Once created and initialized handles to the information packets are given to ICRL which then manages access and destruction of the information sets. This is discussed detail in the ICRHANDLE API Specifications. The information sets can be accessed and manipulated through the dynamically bound API's exposed to ICRL (and therefore available to scripts) by any of the functional modules.
In order to support internal Q/A, field technical support and user level debugging, IIR implements a multiple level Audit Trail execution dump facility. Audit Trail files provide a complete log of the execution path of a script and the code executed by the script.
It is instructive, at this point, to present a short example of a call route prior to detailed descriptions of the modules which perform the work.
1. An incoming call arrives at the PBX 2. ICRTEL receives a corresponding event via the telephony system communicating with the CTI link.
3. ICRTEL creates (allocates) a data information packet which holds all known information about the call, including ANI, DNIS, Prompted Digits, etc. 4. ICRTEL calls a fixed (known) entr/ point inside the ICRL module which begins the call routing process.
5. The ICRL interpreter runs the relevant scripts to process the call. In doing so, the scripts can and will use the functions exported by the various dynamically bound components. 6. Using the function calls exposed to the ICRL interpreter, the scripts call ICRDB to access a customer database to either find or create a new customer record.
7. If a customer record is found, the script receives a handle to the record which that customer's data is cached (in memory) .
8. The script then calls another ICRDB function to look up the most recent agent to service the customer.
9. Finally the script calls an ICRTEL function to route the call to the agent's phone.
It is important to understand that the functionality used by the script, i.e. function calls, are not defined the language of IRCL. They are defined by the functional modules, such as ICRTEL and ICRDB, and provided to the ICRL engine at system start time, or any time thereafter in the form of other (more basic) script language function calls. This is known as dynamic binding and language extension. ICRL depends heavily on dynamic binding to extend the functionality of its scripting language, without itself requiring changes. This dynamic extension of the ICRL interpretive language allows extreme flexibility to functionality upgrades as well as field repairs to bugs.
The Intelligent Call Router Language (ICRL) Overview:
ICRL is a free-form, interpreted language which has structured programming features. All functionality beyond language definition will be handled externally through script function calls, provided to ICRL, by other modules within the system. ICRL defines nothing about the services it ga s from other modules of IIR, but requires them in order to carry out any interesting actions such as a call route. ICRL is built as a stand alone Windows DLL or a Novell NLM. The ICR prefix of the name is a misnomer of the project which bore out this design. ICR-. is useful to any task automation process where information feeds can be attached and script functionality defined to access and manipulate the information.
Running Environment
All external modules of IIP will communicate only indirectly with the ICRL engine. ICRL provides a couple of intrinsic functions through which scripts can load an external module and then bind script function names to functions within the external module. IC^L adds these functions and the syntactical names to its table of known tokens in the interpreter.
This dynamic function extension mechanism alone provides virtually infinite extensibility o. ICRL with no coding changes to ICRL itself. It is usually a good practice to run a set of scripts at system startup time which perform the operations of loading the various external IIR modules and binding all the functions each of these modules provide. This not only speeds up the process of a script later accessing an external func:ιon, but also simplifies it because the script writer need not bother loading the external module or binding the function that is needed. Once the function tables are initialized (at startup) , the ICRL engine will go into a ] istening mode waiting for incoming script run requests. ICRL Protocol
The run-time behavior of the ICR system with the ICRL engine at the core will be controlled through the following protocol. ICRL Startup Phase: At system startup time, the ICRL engine will initialize itself which might include location and loading of global scripts.
ICRL Accept Request Phase: After step 1, the
ICRL engine will go into a listening mode where it will wait for command process requests from any of the modules. The individual modules then may call ICRL
API any time in this mode.
The ICRL engine provides two simple calls in its API either one of which external IIR modules can use to run scripts directly. They are ICRLRunScript ( ) and ICRLRunScriptEx ( ) .
There are two other functions provided by ICRL that can be used together run scripts a two step process:
ICRCreateScriptThreadd and ICRExecuteScriptThread ( ) .
ICRExecuteScnptThreadO and ICRLRunScriptEx ( ) accept variable number of arguments which are handed to the script as command line-like arguments.
For example, when an incoming call reaches ICRTEL, ICRTEL creates or updates the related information packet a nd calls ICRCreat eS c r l p tThread ( ) and ICRExecuteScnptThreadO with its module ID and the handle which identifies the modified information packet as an argument. The handle contains pertinent information about the call for which the event triggered a script run, such as CalllD, ANI, DNIS, etc. The Telephony component creates such a handle for each active call. Functions called from scripts back into the telephony component can use the handle to retrieve information about the call. Handle usage and specifications are discussed in detail in ICRHANDLE API below.
System Startup: At system startup time, the ICRL engine loads a pre-defined script and runs it. This script may, in turn, load and run other scripts using ICRLRunScript () or ICRLRunScriptEx () . Any of the startup scripts can make calls to the two ICRL intrinsic functions: LoadModule ( ) and BindFunction ( ) which allow loading of all external IIR modules and binding of script function names to function pointers within the external module.
The beauty of this design is that the ICRL engine requires no knowledge of the outside world - i.e. which events stimulate script runs and which functions are available during a script execution. The entire system is fully dynamic. This is the key to field upgradability. Since ICRL allows infinite external modules, different versions of the same module can be run at ;he same time. This allows the IIR to be upgraded while running.
The generation of script execution threads and script caching is handled in a layer built over ] CRL and which interfaces to the functional modules of tie IIR. This layer also handles issues closely related to the ICRL script engine by providing miscellaneous utilities such as memory management, information packet access referencing and destruction of the information packets when appropriate. One thing to note is that ICRL itself does not (and need not) distinguish between functions provided by this layer and functions provided by other components.
All functions in the function table can assume information packets which they manipulate are handle-based. That is, the allowed parameter types and return types of external functions are pre-defined and cannot be changed or added to. Though this may seem like a severe restriction, it is actually the exact opposite. This implementation frees ICRL from issues with respect to different data types, allowing it to indirectly handle all data types. The implication of is that ICRL does not support data structures or user defined types. If an ICRL script has to handle fields in a data structure, ICRL has to be given a set of Get/Set functions (in the function table) which work on a handle to that type of structure and return/set the individual fields in that structure. Therefore compatibility issues like Unicode or multi-byte
(international character set) compliance do not arise as the script will have external handlers which do the necessary work to provide compliance as necessary.
ICRL Features
The various language constructs which will be supported by ICRL are listed in the IIR user documentation.
Implementation Issues
The ICRL interpreter engine is implemented using the UNIX compiler generation tools Lex and Yacc. Lex and Yacc together form a powerful compiler definition tool set through which syntax for a language definition can be specified human readable form. The C source code generated by Lex and Yacc is encapsulated in a C/C++ layer that forms the complete parser/interpreter engine.
In addition to the ICRL parser, two other issues are handled by the ICRL module - memory management and string management. Memory management is completely handle based. All functional modules allocate their information packets on behalf of the ICRL engine. These packets are known as handles which relate events to the tied information. Handle aggregation is the technique used to tie the disparate pieces of information with reference counts and the modules that created and can act on the packets. The ICRL module performs all handle management and owns all handles even though the functional modules create and initialize them. ICRL must own the handles because there may be multiple scripts running and accessing the same information simultaneously. Rather than let each module implement its own referencing strategy, a common strategy is implemented by ICRL. This is explained below in detail in ICRHANDLE API Specifications.
Error Reporting and Audit Trail Logging ICRL allows two forms of error reporting. First, a syntax pre-parse of scripts will be performed on all scripts. Prior to running a script, whether for simulation purposes or actual implementation, ICRL reads and parses the script in order to build an execution tree. At each point in the script parsing, ICRL knows whether the script is in proper ICRL form and matches syntactical rules. If the rules are broken at any point in a script, ICRL will provide error reports stating the line number and expected syntax at the point the script is in violation and terminate the pre-parse. Termination is not strictly required, as the recursive decent parser of ICRL is capable of continuing, the parse state after a syntax error can't be guaranteed and significant syntax fallout can occur. In such a case, large amounts of errors will be generated which could actually be erroneous errors.
Second, as all modules of IIR require, ICRL will provide audit trail logging of each code entry point entered during the script execution. It is not possible to define, completely, at this point how much audit trail logging will exist in any given entry point. At the least, each entry point will provide two logs. First the entry which logs all parameters passed into the entry point. Second, the exit point and all parameters and all return values. Any information packet handle will be recursively dumped to the audit trail file.
It is useful to allow levels of audit trailing. The recursive dumps of handles can be expensive in terms of file space, as the information contained in the handle can be large. Therefore, ICRHANDLE objects will be logged based on the bLog member of the handle. This way, a script can turn ICRHANDLE level logging on and off at will to control the size of the audit trail dump.
ICRHANDLE API Specifications
The ICRHANDLE type is the object by which all IIR subsystems transfer their information into and out of the
ICRL engine. All subsystems of the IIR must support the use of the ICRHANDLE to hold store and/or frame allocated information packets. The base handle consists of the following members listed below in Table 1:
Table 1
struct taglCRHANDLE
CTINT nModulelD; This is the unique module identifier
CTINT nReferences; Counter of entities which are currently referencing this object. If the references ever decrease to zero, the IRCL engine will automatically destroy the handle via the handle's virtual HandleDestroy
API.
CTINT bLog; TRUE if this object should be dumped to the audit trail log.
FALSE otherwise. This defaults to FALSE. int Pointer to function, provided by
(*pHandleCompareFunc the subsystem, which is used by
) ( the ICRL engine to compare any
ICRHANDLE hi, two handles belonging to that
ICRHANDLE h2) ; subsystem. int Pointer to function provided by
(*pHandleDestroyFunc the subsystem which is used by ) ( ICRHANDLE h) ; the ICRL engine to free memory associated with that handle after its lifetime
};
typedef struct taglCRHANDLE ICRHANDLEINFOSTRUCT; typedef void* ICRHANDLE; Making the ICRHANDLE a void* hides the ICRHANDLEINFOSTRUCT data members from modules which do not need to know what an ICRHANDLE is. They treat ICRHANDLEs as black boxes. Private modules which do need the ICRHANDLE structure can type cast an ICRHANDLE to the specific structure pointer they want. Any subsystem which registers itself with the ICRL engine must export the following entry points with respect to a handle as listed below Table 2:
Table 2
CTINT This entry point compares two
HandleCompare (ICRHANDLE handles and returns -1, 0 or 1 hi, ICRHANDLE h2) ; for hi < h2, hi == h2 and hi > h2 respectively. void This entry point cleans up all
HandleDestroy( ICRHANDLE ) ; issues with respect to a handle of information and frees the handle itself. void Dumps the handle to the
HandleDump (ICRHANDLE) currently active Audit Trail file.
The ICRHANDLE API will handle all storage and lookup of all handles. The API exposes a high speed lookup mechanism for locating handles based on the contained information and the
HandleCo pare entry point. The following functions are exported to other subsystems by the ICRHANDLE API itself and need not be overridden or duplicated as listed below m Table 3: Table 3
HandleFmd(ICRHANDLE Locates a handle in the hLooksLikeThis) ; handle tables via a (possibly temporary) handle filled with enough information to complete calls to the HandleCompare method. At a minimum, the nModulelD must be provided, as well as any information required by the c a l l i n g mo d u l e ' s HandleCompare entry point.
HandleAddToTable (ICRHANDLE Adds a handle to the table of hAdd) ; handles currently known to the system. This method should always be called after handle creation and initialization. Note that the ICRHANDLE API does not call HandleAddRef. This way calls to Decre entReference do not have to distinguish between whether a handle has a reference and if so, is it in the tables. The handle must be fully initialized before calling this entry point . HandleRemoveFromTable Removes a handle from the (ICRHANDLE hRemove); table of handles currently known to the system. This method should be required only rarely handle manager will automatically remove handles from its tables when they are about to be destroyed void Dumps the base handle portion HandleDump (ICRHANDLE) ; of a handle to the current
Audit Trail file.
HandleDestroy(ICRHANDLE Destroys the handle. This hDestroy) ; method automatically locates the correct module and entry point m that module to call for proper destruction.
HandleAddRef (ICRHANDLE This method increases the hThis) ; reference count on a handle.
Handles will not be destroyed until the reference count has dropped to zero or less.
HandleRelease (ICRHANDLE This entry decrements, by one hThis) ; the reference count of a handle. If the reference count drops to zero, the handle will be removed from the handle tables and its destruction entry point will be called via DestroyHandle. s a simple example, a telephony subsystem would allocate information blocks which hold interesting information about telephony events similar to the following Example 2:
Example 2 struct tagTELINFOSTRUCT {
CTINT nCalllD; CTINT nCrossRefID;
CTCHAR szDevice[32] ; CTCHAR szlnstrument [32] ;
}; typedef tagTELINFOSTRUCT TELINFOSTRUCT, *PTELINFOSTRUCT; struct tagTELHANDLE
{
ICRHANDLEINFO BaseHandle;
TELINFOSTRUCT iTellnfo;
} typedef tagTELHANDLE TELHANDLE, *PTELHANDLE;
CTINT g_nModuleID; static FUNCTIONTABLE s_ftTable; /* this gets filled out somewhere */
CTINT
TelCompareHandle (ICRHANDLE hi, ICRHANDLE h2) { PTELHANDLE pi = (PTELHANDLE) hi;
PTELHANDLE p2 = (PTELHANDLE) h2;
CTINT nCo pare = pl->nCallID - p2->nCallID; return nCompare > 0 ? 1 : nCompare < 0) -1 :
0; } void TelDestroyHandle (ICRHANDLE hThis)
{
PTELHANDLE pThis = (PTELHANDLE) hThis; /* close files, cleanup net connections, free store */
UtsMscFree (pThis) ; }
ICRHANDLE RegisterAndMakeOne ( ) {
PTELHANDLE pThis = (PTELHANDLE) UtsMscMalloc (sizeof (TELHANDLE) ) ; g_IRCLModuleID = ICRLRegister ( s_ftTab1e,
TelDestroyHandle, TelCompareHandle) ;
HandleAddToTable ( (ICRHANDLE) pThis) ; return (ICRHANDLE) pThis;
BOOL
TelProcessEventFromPBX (PEVENTTHING pEvent! {
TELHANDLE hTest;
PTELHANDLE pThis; memset (hTest, 0, sizeof (hTest) ) ; hTest.nModulelD = g_TelModuleID; hTest->nCallID = pEvent->nCallID; pThis = HandleFιnd( (&hTest) ; if (IpThis) {
/* make a new handle and fill it up */ pThis = (PTELHJ?WDLE) UtsMscMalloc (sizeof TELHANDLE); if (pThis) { pThιs->nCallID = pEvent->nCallID /* and so on */ HandleAddToTable ( (ICRHANDLE) pThis) ; /* do whatever should be done to actually handle the event
* like fill up the structure and whatnot */ return CTIERR_ALL_OK; }
Intelligent Call Routing Telephony Module (ICRTEL) Overview:
The IIR's main purpose at revision level 1.0 will be efficient, intelligent call routing. For this to take place, a complete telephony module must be included which implements the functionality required to perform the route command based on the decision logic in the routing scripts. ICRTEL is this module.
The functionality of this module is rather limited, in that its only job is to provide Get/Set methods on the information packets created to represent active calls, methods to perform route sequences. Routing sequences are defined in the ICRL scripts. The route requests within the scripts are carried out by this module.
The general nature of this module follows:
1. A Call becomes available at the PBX 2. The PBX delivers the call events across the
CTI link to the telephony server
3. ICRTEL receives the event message and creates an information packet which holds all pertinent information and history about the call. 4. ICRTEL calls ICRCreateScriptThread ( ) and
ICRExecuteScriptThread( ) to run a script e.nd passes the ICRHANDLE which represents the information packet.
5. The Script makes Database lookups as necessary to determine the correct route 6. The Script calls ICRTEL indirectly through the dynamically bound script functions.
7. ICRTEL performs the desired request, which may be a Get/Set request or a route. A route takes two forms, temporary or terminating. A temporary route is a request to route the call to a VDN in order to collect additional InfoDigits. The script which requests a temporary route does not terminate, rather it is suspended until the VDN collection is complete, after which the script resumes. Prior to resuming the script, ICRTEL fills additional InfoDigit packets in the call information packet corresponding to the call. This additional InfoDigit information is appended to the InfoDigit information already present. Appendage is required in order to allow historical decisions based on the VDN paths during a complete route.
Terminating route requests are routes which are known to have reached the call's final destination. This is representative of a call being sent to a specific agent or agent group. The terminating call route does not, however, terminate the script. It simply terminates the call's ability to be routed to additional sites. The only exception to this rule is if PBX allows a call to be removed from a queue, assuming the call is still m a queue. In such a case, another ICRTEL script API might provide access to that functionality. The script resumes even after a terminating route request, though, so additional logging might be made or other not-routing commands . Since the ICRL engine provides for information packet handle management, ICRTEL does not attempt to manage the handles it creates. ICRTEL inserts, via HandleAddToTables () , handles to the information packets it creates. No other memory and/or handle management is required. Examples of ICRTEL API exposed to scripts follows in Example 3. Example 3
ICRTEL API
ICRTELGetANI (ICRHANDLE) ; qwer
ICRTELSet.ANI (ICRHANDLE) ; qwer
ICRTELGetDNIS (ICRHANDLE) ; qwer ICRTELSetDNIS (ICRHANDLE) ; qwer
ICRTELGetCalllD (ICRHANDLE) ; qwer
ICRTELRoute (ICRHANDLE) ; qwer
ICRTELRoutelnfoDig ts (ICRHA qwer
NDLE) ;
Intelligent Call Routing Database Module (ICRDB)
Overview:
The IIR's ma purpose at revision level 1.0 will be efficient, intelligent call routing. For this to take place, a complete database module must be included which implements the functionality required to perform the route command based on customer database information. ICRDB is a generic implementation of customer records.
The first version of ICRDB allowed onl^ simple single field queries. The current version of ICRDB (ICRDBSQL) implements a generic SQL query and update ability. The most important feature of this external module is that it is designed to be independent of the actual catabase engine used. ICRDB provides methods to perform queries on the database, find the count of records matching a query and standard forward/reverse traversals (enumeration) of the records. Additionally, withm each record, ICRDB provides Get/Set methods per field. This is a difficult issue and may change in design before final shipment of the IIR. The nature of this module is as follows:
1. A Call becomes available at the PBX 2. The PBX delivers the call events across the
CTI link to the telephony server
3. ICRTEL receives the event message and creates an information packet which holds all pertinent information and history about the call. 4. ICRTEL calls ICRCreateScriptThread ( ) and
ICRExecuteScriptThread ( ) to run a script and passes the ICRHANDLE which represents the information packet.
5. The Script makes a query on the customer database based on ANI . 6. ICRDB runs an SQL statement against the database engine which generates a record set of matches. The records are stored n an ICRHANDLE subclass and the handle is returned to the Script.
7. The Script requests from ICRDB, the number (count) of matching records in the record set.
8. The Script rolls (traverses) through the matching records and calls ICRDB to determine, for instance, the speaking abilities of the customer.
9. The Script decides, after locating the correct record, that a Spanish speaking agent is required.
10. The Scripts requests ICRTEL to route the call to a Spanish speaking agent.
Since the ICRL engine provides for information packet handle management, ICRDB does not attempt to manage the handles it creates. ICRDB inserts, via HandleAddToTable () , handles to the record sets created during the running of a script. The disadvantage of this is that it is the responsibility of the script programmer tc request that ICRL remove the record set handles prior to script termination. No other memory and/or handle management is required. Examples of ICRDB API exposed to scripts follows in Example 4.
Example 4 ICRDB API
ICRDBRunQuery ( ) ICRDBGetStringFieldValued
ICRDBSetStringFieldValue ( )
ICRDBGetNumericFieldValue ( )
ICRDBSetNu ericFieldValue ( )
ICRDBMoveNextRecord( ) ICRDBMovePreviousRecord ()
ICRDBMoveUpdateRecord ()
Future
The design of ICRL is based on extensibility requirements. The separation of language features from external functions and dynamic binding of functions makes ICRL very flexible. New functions or even whole components and media (information) feeds could be adced to the IIR with minimal effort. The usage of Lex and Yacc guarantees not only good maintenance of code but also extensibility of language features for future releases.
User's Guide Documentation for Intelligent Information Router Contents of the User's Guide is shown by Table 4. Table 4 - Getting Started
Requirements
Hardware Software
Getting Help
Understanding Typographical Conventions
Installing the Program
Installing Over Existing Files . . . . Beginning the Installation Routine . .
Installing the System Modules
Using the Program for the First Time . . . . - Using the Database Administrator
Setting Up Fields
Defining Primary Key Fields - Using the Agent Station
Searching the Database
Using Wild Card Characters
Modifying the Database Adding a Record
Modifying a Record
Deleting a Record - Writing Scripts
Using the Simulator Window Changing the Appearance of the Simulator
Window
Writing a Script
Opening a Script
Formatting a Script Saving Your Script Printing a script
Previewing a script
Setting up the printer
Selecting a printer font 5 - Testing and Implementing your Scripts . .
Testing Scripts
Test Non-Telephony Scripts . . . .
Testing telephony Scripts
Viewing the Results Making the Script Available
Using the VDN Administrator
Adding a Script
Starting and Stopping a Script . . Refreshing the VDN Settings . . . . Deleting a Script
Modifying the VDN Settings . . . .
6 - Using the Scripting Language
Understanding the IIR Environment . . . Integrating IIR with the AT&T Switch Using Operators and Expressions . . . .
Variables (Declaration, Usage) . . Simulating Constants with Variables
Arithmetic Operators
Relational and Logical Operators Assignment Operators and Expressions
Script Output and String Operators
Comments
Control Flow
Statements and Blocks If-Else-Endif
Select Statement
Loops: For-Next and Do-Loop Until . Program Structure
IIR Function Categorization Guidelines to Follow
Command Summary A - Command Reference
Function ClearRecord . . .
Function ClearDBHandle . .
Function CreateTimeHandle
Function DestroyDBHandle . Function DestroyTimeHandle
Function GetAgentAvailable
Function GetAgentState . .
Function GetAgentTalkState
Function GetAgentWorkMode Function GetAscTime . . .
Function GetCallingDevice
Function GetCurrentTime
Function GetDayOfMonth
Function GetDayOfWeek Function GetDayOfYear
Function GetDst . . .
Function GetHour . . .
Function GetlncommgUUIData
Function Get IncomingUUILength Function GetlncomingUUIType
Function GetlVRCollectVDN
Function GetlVRDigits . .
Function GetlVRIndicator .
Function GetlVRType . . . Function GetLookAheadHours
Function GetLookAheadMinutes Function GetLookAheadPriority
Function GetLookAheadSeconds
Function GetLookAheadSrcVDN
Function GetLookAheadType Function GetMinute
Function GetMonth
Function GetNumericFieldValue
Function GetNumlVRSets . . .
Function GetSecond Function GetStrmgFieldValue
Function GetTrunk
Function GetVDN
Function GetYear
Function ICRLAtoi Function ICRLLeft
Function ICRLMid
Function ICRLRight
Function ICRLStrCopy . . . .
Function ICRLStr Index . . . Function ICRLStrLen . . . .
Function ICRLStrStr . . . .
Function InsertRecord . . .
Function MoveNextKecord . .
Function MovePreviousRecord Function QueryAgentSta e . .
Function RouteFinal . . . .
Function RouteMore
Function RouteUnknown . . .
Function RunQuery Function SetCurrentlVRSets . Function SetDestRoute
Function SetDirectedAgentCallSpli t
Function SetNumeri cFi eldVal ue
Function SetOutgomgUUI Function SetPπ ori tyCall
Function SetRouteSelected
Function SetStringFi eldVal ue
Function SetUserProvidedCode
Function Upda teRecord B - Sample Scripts
C - Terms and Acronyms
D - Error Codes
IIR Simulator Errors
IIR Database Administration Tool IIR Agent Tool
Error Codes
Time Command Errors
Database Error Codes
Telephony Error Codes Miscellaneous Low Level Error Codes
Chapter 1 - Getting Started
The Intelligent Information Router (IIR) is a server- based application for routing incoming telephone calls based upon call information and a set of rules.
The IIR application has the following components: Table 5
Figure imgf000046_0001
Requirements
Check your system to be sure that you have the hardware and software the Intelligent Information Router needs to operate successfully.
Hardware
The following hardware requirements listed in Table 6 are minimum requirements.
Table 6
For your NetWare For your client server machines
Pentium, 100 MHz 486-33 MHz
5 megabytes free hard 10 megabytes free hard drive space drive space Recommend I gigabyte with 12 ms access time 24 megabytes RAM 8 megabytes RAM 16 megs recommenαed)
Software
The following software requirements listed in Table 7 are minimum requirements.
Table 7
For your NetWare For your client server machines
Novell NetWare 3.11 Windows 3.1 Novell Telephony MS-DOS 5.0
Services, v. 2 ATT G3 PBX Driver Win32s (for IIR
, v. 2.2 Simulator only) Btrieve 6.15.525 Btrieve ODBC Interface (v.1.0) for Windows Btrieve Client Engine for Windows, v. 6.15 Getting Help
The following IIR User Guide documentation explains how to use the Intelligent Information Router. Chapter 1 describes the basic requirements needed to run IIR successfully, explains how to install the program files for both the server and client components, and discusses the architecture of the system. Chapter 2, "Using the Database Administrator, " describes the graphical user interface the Database Administrator uses to set up and modify the fields on the Agent Station. Chapter 3. "Using the Agent Station, " discusses the features and operating techniques for the graphical user interface used by the Agents. Chapter 4, "Writing Scripts," provides detailed instructions for operating the script editor and the script simulator window. Chapter 5, "Testing and Implementing your Scripts" explains how to test scripts and how to move them to your production environment. It also introduces the VDN Administrator module. Chapter 6, "Using the Scripting Language," provides comprehensive information for writing scripts. This chapter describes the components of scripts in detail. Appendix A provides reference commands for the scripting language you will use to build the IIIR scripts. Appendix B shows samples of typical scripts. Appendix C lists the terms and acronyms used in this manual. Appendix D lists the error messages and the appropriate actions to take for each. From within the program, you can also open the online help topics for quick access to commonly- requested information. Each module has its own self- contained help file. You can open online help from the help menu in any major window for the topics specific to that window. Understanding Typographical Conventions
The information below will help you find and use the information in the documentation for the Intelligent Information Router. Sequential instructions are numbered steps that must be followed in the order in which they are presented. Filenames appear in this font: autoexec.bat (filename) to set it apart from information in the text. Text that you are to type, such as text for scripts, is
Shown as thi s : declare local variable .
Installing the Program
The installation routine for the Intelligent
Information Router allows you to install all or a portion of the program files. You will need to know a few details about your system to install the files successfully, so pl ease take a moment to review this chapter before you begin to ensure that you have all the information you will need.
1. Read each section carefully before you begin. 2. Write the information required for each step beside the illustrations as you review the chapter to make it readily accessible at the appropriate step.
3. Open Windows (Program Manager or File Manager) .
4. Make sure that you have Btrieve installed on the server and the Btrieve ODBC Interface for Windows installed on the client (see Hardware Requirements) .
5. Make sure that you are logged on to the NetWare server when you begin installing the program. Installing Over Existing Files
If you are reinstalling any of the IIR modules over a previous installation, you must follow the steps below before beginning the new installation. 1. Make certain that any existing NetWare Loadable
Modules/ (NLMs) are not running on the server. All exi sting NLMs mus t not be running when you install the NLM. Check this by running "modules " a t the NetWare system prompt . Key IIR NLMs incl ude ICRCTL , ICRL , CTNET, CTIPX, CTUTS . To Unload Existing NLMs, qui t ICRS CONSOLE and unl oad ICRS by running ' "uli crs " a t system consol e prompts . Al so, if you are installing NLMs on a separa te NetWare and Tel ephony servers, you must move three NLMs (osfasnl .nlm, tslib.nlm, attpriv.nlm) from NetWare server to the Telephony server. 2. Back up your existing scripts and databases (both production and simulation) in a directory ether than the one to which you are installing now. The current installation overwrites some of these files, though you should receive a warning prompt for this action. Beginning the Installation Routine To start the installation,
1. Insert Disk 1 of the set of installation disks into your floppy disk drive.
2. From the File menu, select Run. 3. In the command line, type a: \setup where a: is the floppy drive. 4. Press Enter. Entering Your User Information
As shown by FIGURE 6A, The first window to appear is the setup window 500. This window identifies you as the user. 1. Type your first and last names 501.
2. Type the name of your company 502.
Installing the System Modules
As shown by FIGURE 6B, in the IIR Setup window 503, you can select which of the IIR module you want to install. You may install the modules in any order, although if you are installing the IIR on a system with no previous IIR installations, it usually works best to install from top to bottom (i.e., begin with NLMs; end with database administrator) .
Installing All Modules - General Information
To use the setup window 503 for each module 504, follow the general options below. 1. Click the button of the module 504 you want to install (the order is unimportant) .
2. In the setup window, type the information required.
When typing a path and filename, include the drive. For example, If you type a path for a directory that does not exist, the IIR installation routine creates the directory for you. 3. Click the Start Install button.
4. Change diskettes when prompted. 5. Click the OK button m the dialog box announcing successful installation.
6. Select a program group for the icon.
7. (Optional) Check the option for Add to Start Up Group to open the module every time you start Microsoft
Windows .
8. Click the OK button to return to the IIR Setup window 503.
In the IIR Setup window 503, you can continue installing IIR modules, or you can exit the window.
Notes about the Database Path
When you install the modules, the installation looks for existing database files. If you have existing database files, a dialog box appears and asks if you want to overwrite the old database. Use the following guidelines. If you have backed up the database file, click the Continue button (you can copy your old database file later into the directory if necessary) . If you have not backed up the database file, but do not want to overwrite the file, click the Quit button to stop the installation process and return to the IIR Setup window. If you want to overwrite the old database, click the Continue button. When you install more modules within the same installation session, the message will not appear again.
NLM
As shown by FIGURE 6C, the NLM window 505 installs the NetWare Loadable Module (NLM) on the server . If you are reinstalling this module over an old one, make certain that the existing IIR NLM module is not running. Type the following information. For Mapped Drive and Path 506 type the drive and path where IIR will install the files. For NetWare Volume 508 type the server's volume name (for example ASH) . For Switch ID 510 type (pull-down list only) the name of the telephony switch (should display the default switch ID) .
Simulator
As shown by FIGURE 6D, the simulator window 511 installs the script simulator, designed to run on Win 32S. For Install Path 512 type location to install the Simulator module. For Database Path 514 type location for the IIR to create the database. If this path does not exist, the IIR creates it. If the path and database do exist, the IIR overwrites them. For User Ini Files Path 516 type location for the user initiation files
VDN Administrator
As shown by FIGURE 6E, the VDN Administrator window 517 installs the VDN Administrator for matching scripts to the Vector Directory Number (VDN) . For Install Path 518 type location to install the VDN Administrator module. For Server IPX Address 520 type IPX address of your server. The IPX address is defined in the autoexec.ncf file the system subdirectory of the NetWare server. The line titled lpx internal will provide the first eight characters of the IPX address (network address) followed by the entity within the network or server domain (usually "1" for the server) . For example, if the line says "ipx internal net 6125100A" then the address is "6125100A.000000000001. " For User Ini Files Path 522 type location for your user initiation files . Agent Station
As shown by FIGURE 6F, the Agent Station Window 523 installs the Agent Station module, which Agents use to modify information the database. For Install Path 524 type location to install the Agent Station module. For Database Path 526 type location of the production database path on the network server. This path is a combination of the network drive with the NLMs and the subdirectory containing the database. For example, if your network drive is L, and your subdirectory is \ιιr, then use the database path L. \nr\data.
Database Administrator
As shown by FIGURE 6G, the Database Administrator Window 527 installs the Database Administrator module, which Administrators use to set up the Agent Stations. For Install Path 528 type location to install the Database Administrator module. For Database Path 530 type location of the production database path on the network server. This path is a combination of the network drive with the NLMs and the subdirectory containing the database. For example, if your network drive is L, and your subdirectory is Mir, then use the database path L : \iir\da ta .
When you have finished installing the modules that you selected, you can exit the installation process from the Installation Setup window (see Figure 6B - Setup Window) . Click the Exit button. This program returns you to the Windows Program Manager.
Using the Program for the First Time
The IIR does not use a common interface for all tasks. Ordinarily you simply open the IIR folder and click the icon for the module you want to use. If you have just installed the IIR, however, you will first want to understand where to go from here, and why. You have ust installed up to four client applications for the Intelligent Call Router: Database Administrator, Agent Station, Simulator and VDN Administrator.
You can, of course, open any of the applications, but the logical sequence below is for using the IIR the first time: 1. Se t up your fi el d l abel s - You must define and set up the labels and properties of the fields in your customer database. To do this, open the Database Admini stra tor. Chapter 2 discusses this module. 2. Popul a te the cus tomer da taba se . 3. Wri te the scripts - The scripts are the heart of the IIR. The tool for writing scripts is the Simula tor. Chapter 4 discusses the Simulator window and how to use the scripting editor. If you are unfamiliar with script writing, you can read Chapter 6 for a comprehensive overview and guide to the IIR scripting language.
4. Tes t your scripts - When you have written a script, you must use the Simulator to test it. Chapter 5 explains this process.
5. Associa te the script to a Vector Directory Number (VDN) - When you have tested your script and found it to be successful, you must associate it with the VDN, using the VDN Administrator. The last section of Chapter 5 explains how to associate the VDΝ to the script and create settings for each script. 6. Modify customer records - This step comes only after the IIR is running successfully and executing scripts. To modify records in the customer database, use the Agent Sta tion module, as discussed in Chapter 3.
Chapter 2 - Using the Database Administrator The Database Administrator allows anyone with administration privileges to set up the database and perform other tasks which globally affect the Intelligent Information Router. As shown by FIGURE 7, the Database Administrator has a single window 600, which allows you to set up the fields that appear in the IIR Agent Station window. You can label the fields, designate agent privileges (view and modify) for each of the fields, and define the primary key fields.
Setting Up Fields
You may label up to 15 text fields and 5 numeric fields. For each field, you may also designate agent viewing and modifying privileges.
1. Type the labels (maximum 20 characters) next to the field number.
2. To allow agents to view the field, click the View check box.
3. To allow agents to modify the contents of the field, click the Modify check box. Notes: Check box with an x (B) means that the option is enabled. Modify option is void unless you also check the View field. Field 1 601 has special weight. If you allow agents to view and modify this field, agents can add or delete any record. If you allow agents to view bu not modify this field, you can check the modify option on other fields. Agents can then modify information in fields other than Field 1. They cannot add or delete records. Text fields may contain spaces (for example, an address field: New York) . Numeric fields default to integers.
Defining Primary Key Fields The Primary Key fields 602 protect against duplicate data. You can choose one of three options in the Primary Key Definition area. None 604 turns off the Primary Key Field designation. Field 1 606 sets the first field as Primary Key. Field 1 and 2 608 sets the first and second fields as Primary Keys.
To select an option,
1. Click the option button for the option you want.
2. Click the Apply button to activate your labels and key definition. The next chapter explains how to use the Agent Station window that you have just defined.
Chapter 3 - Using the Agent Station
As shown by FIGURE 8, the Agent Station window 700 is predefined by the Database Administrator (described in the previous chapter) . With this window, an agent can modify the information in the database. To modify the fields shown, you must have modification privileges (see "Setting
Up Fields") .
Searching the Database
The first four fields contain information that the IIR engine uses to search the database. When it finds a match, it displays all fields for the record. To search the database,
1. Type the search information m the Search
Fιeld(s) 701. 2. Click the Search button 702. The search results appear in the fields 703 outside/below the Search Fields section. *Io move forward or backward in the database, click the Pr v 704 or Next button 706. These buttons scroll one record at a time.
Using Wild Card Characters
When you search the database, the IIR produces exact matches only, with one exception. If you type "Donald" but have no matching data, IIR continues searching for any wild card characters to the right of the letters you type. So, for example, if the database contains a Donaldson, the IIR also finds that name.
Multiple Characters
If you are unsure of the spelling, use the percent sign as a wild card. For example, if you want to find a name but are not sure if the spelling is Anderson or Andersen, you would type "Anders%n." The IIF search engine finds all records that match the other letters: Anderson, Andersen, Andersan, Andersun, Andersian (the wild card can represent more than one letter) . The search engine would display the first available match and you could then use the Prev or Next buttons to scroll back and forth through additional records. Depending upon your ODE.C drivers, the search may or may not be case sensitive.
Single Character
You can also search for a single wildcard character by using the underscore character (_) . (Insert: ( )) . For example, in the case above with the name Anderson, if you type Anders n, the search would not match the name .Andersian, because it has two characters between the letters s and n.
Modifying the Database Modifying the database includes adding, changing, or deleting information. Because the changes affect the record in the database, you must have privileges assigned by the Database Administrator.
Adding a Record
To add a record you must have modification privileges to Field 1.
1. Type the information in the fields 703 below the Search Fields 701. 2. Click the Add button 708 to create a new record.
Modifying a Record
To modify a record, you must have modification privileges to the field you want to modify. 1. Search the database for the record you want to modify, if it is not already displayed.
2. Click the Update button 710 to change the information.
Deleting a Record
To delete a record, you must have modification privileges to Field 1.
1. Search the database for the record you want to modify, if it is not already displayed. 2. Click the Delete button 712.
The record erases the record from the database and is not recoverable. Chapter 4 - Writing Script
Scripts are powerful tools that enable you to write a set of commands to automate for running repetitive tasks. The Intelligent Information Router engine reads and executes the commands, which you write a special scripting language. The scripts are made even more powerful by allowing you to use conditional logic.
This chapter introduces you to the scripting process, including creating, modifying, and prmtmc with the IIR script editor.
Using the Simulator Window
As shown by FIGURE 9A, the Simulator window 800 has two sections: script section 801 and output section 803 . The script section in the upper portion of the window displays the script windows. Each window serves as a script editor for writing and modifying your scripts.
Use the output section 803 in the bottom of the window to view the results of testing your script commands. When you open the window, this section also contains initialization information for related files. If you do not see this information, the simulator is not properly initialized.
You may open multiple edit windows and organize them in various arrangements (tile, cascade, etc.) . The simulator window 800 shown in FIGURE 9A has two scripts open. By default, the window opens with a blank page in the script window. When you save this script, the name of the script appears in the title bar of the εcπpt window.
Changing the Appearance of the Simulator Window You can change the appearance of the Simulator window 800 to allow more workspace. From the View menu 802 , click Toolbar and/or Status Bar to hide or unhide these objects. From the Windows menu 804, select Cascade to stagger your script windows. From the Windows menu 804, select Tile to see the scripts in rows. From the Windows menu 804, select Arrange Icons to align minimized (iconized) script windows. Move the output window. This window is dockable, meaning that if you move it to another border, it attaches itself to the border. You can also use it as standalone. To move the output window, grab it with your mouse and drag to another location. If you close the output window, you cannot reopen it until you exit the Simulator window and reopen.
Writing a Script
The IIR allows you to write as many scripts as you need. The IIR Script Editor is a simple ASCII text editor with a few enhanced options. With the IIR script editor, you can use formatting options (including fonts) and you can copy from other scripts, using standard Windows-based copy-and-paste techniques.
Opening a Script When you open the Simulator application, a blank window appears by default. You can use this window to write a new script, open additional new windows, or open existing scripts.
New Script
If no blank windows are available, or to open additional blank windows, 1. From the File menu, select New.
2. Proceed to the section on page 19, "Formatting the Script."
Existing Script
To open an existing script,
1. From the File menu, select Open.
2. In the Open dialog box, select a script (scripts have the file extension .icr) . This dialog allows you to search your directories for scripts. When you install the IIR Simulator, i t creates a subdirectory named userscr for storing your scripts . If you want to have this dial og box open to this subdirectory, foll ow these steps . In Windows program manager, cli ck to select the IIR Simula tor i con . From the File menu, select properties . In the "working directory" field, enter the full pa th of the userscr directory. For example : c: \iir\sim\userscr. Cli ck the OK button .
3. Click the OK button. 4. Proceed to the section, "Formatting the Script."
Formatting the Script
The general procedure for editing a script includes the steps below: 1. Place your cursor in a script window.
2. Begin typing. For information on the IIR scripting language, please refer to Appendix B.
3. From the File menu, select Save or Save As to save your script. The IIR uses the standard Windows Save dialog.
The formatting options are available from the Settings menu. Select Tab Stops to set the number of spaces to use for tabs. You may select from 1 to 16 spaces for tabs. The tab settings affect only the active script. Select Editor Font to select a font for the script editor (see "Choosing Fonts" on page 19 for information. The font setting affects all script windows. Select Word Wrap to wrap text from one line to the next without a line break. The Word Wrap option affects only the active script.
Copying from Other Scripts The IIR script editor allows you to copy from other scripts by using Windows techniques for copy-and-paste. The script editor does not support drag-and-drop copying. Please refer to your Windows documentation if you need help with these techniques.
Choosing Fonts
Font choices apply to all scripts. You cannot maintain scripts with different fonts. IIR allows you to select True Type fonts for both screen and printer, although these fonts may produce undesirable results. Most True Type fonts are proportional, which means that each character uses a different amount of space. For example, the letter . uses less space than the letter w. In contrast, nonproportional fonts such as the Courier typeface are proportional. All these letters take up exactly the same space.
For printing, proportional fonts are considered easier to read. For formatting scripts, however, you cannot always vertically line up individual characters or lines of text if you use proportional fonts. If spacing is important to you, use a nonproportional font such as Courier, Terminal, MS Sans Serif, or MS Serif. Also, you can edit any IIR script in any ASCII text editor, but not all text editors can use proportional fonts. If you open a script in one of these editors, your spaces and alignments will change and font appearance may be unpredictable.
Using the Find Dialog
To find a string of characters,
1. Place your cursor in the script you want to search.
2. From the Edit menu 808, select Find.
3. As shown by FIGURE 9B, in the Find What field 809, type the string.
4. (Optional) Check the Match Case option to find only occurrences with exact match of uppercase and lowercase letters.
5. Check the direction for your search, Up (this point to beginning of script) or Down (this point to end) .
6. Click the Find Next button to go to the string. The dialog box does not close, aL.owmg you to continue searching through the script text.
Using the Find and Replace Dialog
To find and replace a string of characters: 1. Place your cursor in the script you want to search.
2. From the Edit menu 808, select Find and Replace.
3. As shown by FIGURE 9C, the Find What field 811, type the string that you want to replace. 4. In the Replace With field 813, type the new string. 5. (Optional) Check the Match Case to find only occurrences with exact match of uppercase and lowercase letters. The editor replaces these strings with the exact case of the string in the Replace With field. 6. Click the Find Next button to go to the string.
7. When the string is found, click the Replace button to replace the string and find the next occurrence. Or, click the Replace All button to replace all matching strings. 8. Click the Cancel button to close the window.
The dialog box does not close, allowing you to continue searching through the script text.
Saving Your Script You can save your changes at any time. When you close the script or exit the IIR Simulator with unsaved changes, a dialog message prompts you to save your changes.
To save anytime, choose one option. From the File menu 806, select Save. If you are saving an existing script, this dialog saves changes to the existing file name. From the File menu 806, select Save As. If you are saving an existing script, this dialog prompts you for a new filename. It saves changes to the new filename, leaving the old file unaffected. To save changes when you exit the IIR Simulator,
1. From the File menu 806, select Exit.
2. In the Save dialog message, choose click one button. Yes - Saves the changes to the filename shown in the dialog. No - Closes the application without saving any changes. Cancel - Returns to the program. Changes your script are still intact, but the script is still unsaved. Printing a script
As shown by FIGURE 9D, the IIR editor allows you to print your screen to paper or a file (ASCII) . Your dialog window 820 may differ slightly from the one in FIGURE 9D, depending upon your printer driver. Please refer to your Windows documentation if you need help with using the Print dialog window.
Previewing a script Before you print, you can see your script as it would print.
1. From the File menu 806, select Print > Preview.
2. Use the command buttons at the top of the Preview window to change the view. 3. Click the Close button to return to the editor.
Setting up the printer
The IIR uses the Windows print setup dialog.
Selecting a printer font
By default, the IIR uses the System (non-True Type, nonproportional) font. You can change this font. Please refer to "Choosing Fonts" for information about proportional versus nonproportional fonts and how they affect your scripts.
To select a printer font,
1. From the Settings menu 822, select Printer Font.
2. Select Change to open the Font dialog box. Select Same as Display to use the same font that you use in the editor (no dialog box) .
The next chapter provides more information on using the Simulator window. Chapter 5 - Testing and Implementing Your Scripts
The following stages explain the basic processes of creating and using scripts. Create the script, using the script editor in the IIR Simulator window. Test your scripts with simulated data and view their output in the IIR Simulator window. Implement the scripts with the VDN Administrator. This module sets up the scripts to work on your development platform. This chapter explains how to test and implement the scripts.
Testing Scripts
The IIR Simulator opens with a blank page in the screen editor. As shown by FIGURE 9A, you can use the editor to write a script on this blank page or open an existing script. Generally, your scripts fall into one of two categories: telephony (involving data received from an incoming call or data supplied by the caller dialing more digits) or non-telephony (scripts which do not test telephony calls) . The non-telephony calls probably represent a very small percentage of your scripts.
Testing Non-Telephony Scripts To test a script, 1. Open the script if it is not already open.
2. Click the title bar of the script to make it active. A script must be active (on top, if you have more than one screen showing) for you to test it.
3. (Optional) From the Settings menu, select Hide While Running to hide the entire window while you are running the Simulator.
4. From the File menu, select Run Direct. Or, click the Simulate icon | p[ on the toolbar.
Testing Telephony Scripts To test a script,
1. Open the script (see "Opening a Script" for help) if necessary.
2. Click the title bar of the script to make it active. 3. (Optional) From the Settings menu, select Hide
While Running to hide the entire window while you are running the Simulator.
4. From the File menu, select Simulate.
Or, click the Simulate icon | p[ on the toolbar.
Using the Telephony Handle Simulator
As shown by FIGURE 10A, a new window 910 appears if you are simulating a telephony script. This window allows you to enter the information here to simulate the information that the route request would ordinarily provide for a live call.
To use this window
1. Enter the information you want to simulate. See Table 8 below.
2. Click the OK button.
The results of the test or simulation appear m the output window.
Table 8 Fi el ds Descripti on
VDN Enter the VDN that would normally handle calls for this script. If you do not use VDN in your script, you do not need to enter anything in this field.
CallmgDevice Enter the calling device that represents a call that would normally route through your script. If you do not use
CallmgDevice in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
Trunk Enter a trunk group that represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use Trunk m your script, you do not need to populate this field.
UUI Enter User-To-User Information (UUI) that represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use UUI your script, you do not need to populate this field.
Us erEn t eredCode Enter UserEnteredDigits that Digits represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use UserEnteredDigits m your script, you do not need to populate this field.
UserEnt eredCode Enter UserEnteredType that Type represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use UserEnteredType in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
UserEnt eredCode Enter UserEnteredlndicator that Indicator represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use UserEnteredlndicator in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
UserEnteredCode Enter UserEnteredVDN that CollectionVDN represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use UserEnteredVDN in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
LookAheadlnfo Enter LookaheadType that Type represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use LookaheadType in your script, you do not need to oopulate this field.
LookAheadlnfo Enter LookaheadPriority that Priority represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use Lookahead Priority in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
LookAheadlnfo Enter LookaheadHour that Hours represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use Lookahead Hour in ycur script, you do not need to oopulate this field.
LookAheadlnfo Enter LookaheadMinutes that Minutes represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use Lookahead Hour in ycur script, you do not need to oopulate this field.
LookAheadlnfo Enter LookaheadSeconds that Seconds represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use Lookahead Seconds i your script, you do not need to populate this field.
LookAheadlnfo EnterSourceVDN that SourceVDN represents a call that would normally route through this script. If you do not use
Lookahead SourceVDN in your script, you do not need to populate this field.
When you have entered the information required, you can begin the test. Click the OK button 912 to begin the simulation. Click the Cancel button 914 to end the Simulation.
Viewing the Results
As shown by FIGURE 10B, if you have print or println commands in your script, the results of your test appear in the output window 920 at the bottom of the screen.
Changing the Position
You can move the output window to any position on the screen, including leaving it as standalone or docking it to the top or sides of the window, but not resize it.
To move the window,
1. Click the window in the gray border area.
2. Drag to the new location.
To clear the output window, select Clear Output from the Edit menu.
Making the Script Available
When you have tested a script and viewed the successful output, you are ready to make the script available to your production environment.
To copy the script to another location, 1. Click the title bar of the script to make it active.
2. In the File menu, select Save As.
3. Save the script to your production subdirectory on the NetWare server usually serscr
You can also use Windows File Manager to copy the script to the appropriate subdirectory. When the script is place, it is ready for you to associate with a Vector Directory Number (VDN), using the VDN Administrator.
Using the VDN Administrator
As shown by FIGURE IOC, the VDN Administrator matches the scripts to the VDN and starts and stops the scripts on the production system. When you open the VDN Administrator window 930, a list box 932 displays all scripts that are set up for the system. You can click the column title (VDN or Script) to sort the list on that column.
Adding a Script To add a script,
1. Click the New button 936 to open the VDN Properties window 938 shown by FIGURE 10D.
2. Enter a VDN to associate with the script.
3. Enter the script filename (use the Browse button
4. Check one or both options. Set Default Route Session 940 to set all unassigned VDNs to run a designated script. Set Start Script Route Session 942 to assign a VDN to a script and sets the script to start immediately. You may set only one script for one VDN, but ycu may set more than one VDN for a single script. Starting and Stopping a Script
Returning to FIGURE IOC, if a script is not started or is inactive, the check box is empty and the script name appears as light gray. You may start a script with any of three methods. Click the Start button 943. Click the check box next to the VDN in the VDN Administrator window. Click the check box for Start Script Route Session the VDN Properties window.
Refreshing the VDN Settings
The Refresh feature is helpful for determining which scripts are currently active or "started." For example, if a script is accidentally deleted or stopped, this window reflects the status when refreshed.
Using Refresh Command
To force the VDN Administrator to refresh the settings at any time, click the Refresh button 944. You can also set the screen to refresh automatically as shown in the next section.
Setting the Refresh Time Rate
As shown by FIGURE 10E, to set the automatic refresh rate, 1. Enter the refresh time using seconds.
2. Click the Start Timer button 946. The default is ten (10) seconds. You may set any value from 10 to 64. To set the refresh to never refresh automatically, click the Cancel button 948. Deleting a Script
Returning again to FIGURE IOC, the Delete command in the VDN Administrator window does not remove the script from the directory. Instead, it removes the script from the window only.
1. Select the script you want to remove.
2. Click the Delete button 950 below the script list box.
Modifying the VDN Settings
Use the VDN Properties window to modify settings also.
1. Select a script in the list box.
2. Click the Modify button 952 to open the VDN Properties window 938. 3. Change the settings (see "Adding a Script" for further information) .
4. Click the OK button to save your changes and close the window.
Chapters 5 and 6 have explained the overall concepts of the IIR Simulator window. The next chapter provides a detailed look at the IIR scripting language.
Chapter 6 - Using the Scripting Language
The Intelligent Information Router (IIR) system is designed to route calls in a call center environment. The IIR is more intelligent and flexible than the existing ACD/PBX equipment, using the IIR Script as the mechanism through the system obtains the advanced intelligence and flexibility. To develop the IIR scripts, you can use the IIR
Simula tor, a primary component of the IIR. The IIR Simulator provides an interactive script development environment for testing and debugging of scripts without leaving the tool. If you have not already become familiar with the IIR Simulator tool, please read the sections on "Writing Scripts" (beginning on page 17) and "Testing and Implementing your Scripts" (page 23) before continuing.
This chapter provides development-related details on the IIR script language, including standards, pragmas, and syntax.
Understanding the IIR Environment
It is important to understand how the IIR scripts integrate with other components in the call center. The IIR is an intelligent adj unct router when viewed from the switch perspective. The AT&T switch views the IIR as one of possibly several adjunct processors that will provide call routing direction back to the switch when requested.
Although the PBX/ACD can make rudimentary decisions about routing of calls through vector processing commands, it makes global routing decisi ons rather than customer- oriented routing decisions. For example, the PBX/ACD can determine routing based upon the number of agents available for a particular queue or time of day (for after-hours handling) . The routing capability stops there, however, as the PBX/ACD does not have access to customer specific data nor the operations available to process such data in the vectoring commands. Although this type of routing was an advanced feature a few years ago, today's call centers are demanding more customer-oriented routing capabilities which is where the IIR takes over. By integrating the IIR to the PBX/ACD as an adj unct routing controller, an option available through the vectoring capabilities on the switch, the IIR easily performs customer-specific routing. Through sophisticated logic control combined with access to customer-specific databases, the IIR increases productivity and service by allowing customer-specific routing. Customer-specific routing can combine information such as ANI, customer-entered digits, or the VDN from which the caller is being routed to make determinations about the routing destination of the caller. For example, when the IIR receives the adjunct route request, it also receives the TSAPI route request message containing all pertinent information about the caller including ANI, originating VDN (DNIS), user-entered digits (DTMF collected), and many other fields. The IIR then uses this information to provide a database lookup and an eventual route based upon the logic in the IIR script.
The service and efficiency possibilities become almost limitless with this intelligent adjunct router. Consider the following scenario where the routing of the caller is determined by multiple factors in a spec fied order of priority.
A call center manager needs to provide t hree l evel s of servi ce for the bank card customers . All bank card customers have been classified into three membership categories including Pla tinum, Gold, and Standard. The customer classifi ca tion, along wi th the customers home phone, business phone, account number, current balance, account limi t , and other informa ti on are stored m the IIR customer database. The call center manager designs mul tiple service queues for the different customer classification to provide the shortest wai ts along wi th the most experienced Customer Service Representa ti ves (CSRs) to the Pla tinum, w ie the standard customers receive the longest queue times and least experienced representatives .
The switch sends all service calls to the IIR, The IIR then performs a lookup on the ANI information. If it finds a match, it determines the customer classification and returns the route for the appropriate agent queue. If it does not find a match, the IIR performs a RouteMore command that sends the call back to the switch for collection of account number digits. Then, based upon these digits, the IIR performs a lookup, matches the customer classification, and routes the call to the correct agent queue. Through this very simple case, the call center has transparently provided differentiated service without having to manage, publish, and maintain updates on different marketing numbers for different classes of service.
At this point, the call center administrator might decide to provide continuity to its Platinum members by always queuing them to a specific customer service agent, if available, while a customer related problem maintains an open state. The IIR can then match the service, determine Platinum, and then route the call to a specific agent, based upon dynamic updates made by the customer service agents. The IIR can determine not only if a specific agent is logged m, but also determine whether the agent is currently on an active call. By using combinations of priority and agent skills, the IIR could queue Platinum callers to a specific agent for preferential treatment.
The routing possibilities are extraordinary with the use of the IIR adjunct. The remainder of this chapter will explain how to develop an IIR script instead of the logical application. Scripting constructs, control flow, program structure, and script language reference w ll provide you with the knowledge to empower your call center.
Integrating IIR with the AT&T Switch The section above discussed at a high level the integration of the IIR and some possible applications. Before attempting the language constructs, you will need to examine the functional integration of the II with the AT&T switch. The first integration issue to coisider is the component which actually controls whether the IIR is requested to determine a route: the PBX/ACD. The mechanism on the PBX/ACD which invokes the IIR is a combination of the Vector Directory Number (VDN) and call vectoring. Call vectoring is a limited "scripting" language on the switch which provides sequential handling of calls. A standard part of the call vectoring language is the' adj unct route request step .
The adjunct route request step requires that the adjunct connect to the PBX/ACD via the ASAI link. In this case, a system running telephony services for the AT&T DEFINITY G3 connects to the switch and serves as the "information link" between the IIR and the switch. When the adjunct route request is encountered in the call vectoring sequence, the switch sends a Route Reques t Servi ce from the switch to the IIR via the telephony server. This route request contains detailed information about the call that the IIR uses to route the call (which includes ANI, originating VDN, trunk, user-entered data [DTMF collected digits] , and other information) .
The IIR, a client to the telephony server, receives the route request service event and associates the originating VDN with one of the IIR scripts. All of the information in the Route Request Service request is available within the IIR script to use in determining the appropriate route. The IIR also has access to a customer database using one or several of the route request fields as a key to the database (i.e., it can match .ANI against the phone number in the database to determine a record match) .
Once the IIR has determined where to route the call, it issues a .Route Select Service message back to the PBX/ACD via the telephony server. The Route Select Service message contains a destRoute field that the IIR fills in with the destination extension number (can represent VDN, agent login-id, etc.) . The Route Select Service message can also be sent back with other fields used for application to application communications.
The general concept is fairly simple. The AT&T switch requests a route to be performed through the adj unct route request step in call vectoring. This sends a Route Request Servi ce message to the IIR. The IIR determines which IIR script to execute based upon the origin VDN and executes this script. The script interacts with the customer database, applies logic to the information, and determines a route destination. This information is placed into the Route Select Servi ce message which returns to the call vector awaiting routing direction.
The logic within the IIR script varies with each script, but the same basic process exists in each script. The following sections detail the actual functions used to perform these operations, along with details on all logic capabilities available in the IIR script language. Using Operators and Expressions
This section explains opera tors and expressi ons of the IIR script language. Operators include arithmetic, logical (comparison), assignment operators, and others. Expressions include variable declarations, assignment expressions, and general expressions. The sections below explain how operators and expressions interact.
Variables (Declaration, Usage) Variables fall into two classifications in the IIR scripting language: local and gl obal . You must define all variables before referencing them m the script. Normally, you declare the variables near the top of a script, although you can declare them ust before the section where they are used.
Local variables require the keyword l ocal before the name of the variable. All local variables are variant nature: they can contain either numeric (integer or float) or string data. The information associated WLth a variable depends upon the type of data assigned to the variable. Normally, the assignment is to a numeric or string valued returned from one of the IIR functions.
Local variables are created for each scipt execution and only exist throughout the execution of the script. Future invocations of the same script for a different call will reinitialize variables to default values. Local variables can be declared one per line, or can be combined on a single line within the script as shown oy Example 5. Example 5 local varOne local varTwo local varThree local varOne, varTwo, varThree
Variable names can consist of up to 32 characters, and can have a combination of numeric and alpha characters and mixed case. Good programming practice dictates comments for each variable or set of variables. Comments can exist on the same line as the declaration, and each is prefaced with a '#' (pound) sign. The value of a local variable cannot be referenced until it has been assigned a value within the script as shown by Example 6. Example 6
#Thιs is the first variable m the script
#Thιs is the second variable, used for string manipulation #Thιs is the third variable ...
Gl obal variabl es are IIR specific variables that can be referenced or set in the script. These variables normally pass system information into the script (such as the script name, script execution id, or logging level for the particular script) .
The global variables are not global between scripts, but instead apply to the instance of the script being executed. In addition, no global variables other than those defined by the system can be declared. In other words, the global definition only provides access to pre-existing system global variables and is not a declaration of a new global variable. Global variables are defined in the script by prefacing the variable name with the keyword gl obal as shown by Exampl e 7.
Example 7 global g nICRLLogLevel # Global variable to control logging level from this scr -pt global $0, $1 # $0 is the name of the script being executed # $1 is the telephony event hande used to obtain the call information
NOTE: Global variables '$0' and '$1' are necessary for obtaining the route request information for all telephony functions. These global variables should be, as a practice, exposed all script s by declaring them as shown above.
Simulating Constants with Variables This scripting language does not provide true constants, although good programming practice defines at the top of the script the local variables that would normally be set as constants for ease maintenance.
The following examples of Example 8 show variables declared and then assigned to be used as constants throughout the application. Note that the variables have been declared in all capitals, which is not necessary but allows for differentiation throughout the script.
Example 8 local RET_0K # Valid return from all but handle allocations of 0 local DEFAULT_RTE # Default route to send caller to local AFTERHR_RTE # After hours default route
RET_OK=0
DEFAULT_RTE=2999 AFTERHR RTE=3999
By defining these values at the top of the script, you can easily modify these values m a single location, even if you reference them many times in the script. This practice is particularly useful in setting up default routes that might change on an infrequent basis.
Arithmetic Operators
The binary arithmetic operators are (+, -, *, /) . You can apply these operators to any numeric variables in the script, basing the result upon whether the arguments are integers or float. If either variable being operated on is float, the result is a float. If both variables are integer in type, the result is integer. You may combine integer and float variables in arithmetic operations without casting.
The following Example 9 shows examples of code and the result:
Example 9 local nu One, nu Two, result # declare variables for math ops numOne = 4.8 numTwo = 2 result = numOne/numTwo <result = 2.4> result = numTwo * numTwo <result = 4> result = numOne - (numTwo * numTwo) <result = 0.8> Relational and Logical Operators
The following relational operators in Table 9 can compare numeric as well as string data.
Table 9 "==" - comarpison of equal
"<>" - comparison of does not equal
"<" - compπson of less than
">" - comparison of greater than
"<=" - comparison of less than or equal to ">=" - comparison of greater than or equal to
The logical operators for forming expresssions are shown by Table 10:
Table 10
"Not" ".And" "Or" Some legal combinations of the above in an 'if statement are shown by Example 10-
Example 10
# If varOne is less than varTwo and varOne is not zero if ( (varOne < var Two) And i varOne <> 0) ) then ... if ( (varOne < varTwo) And (Not varOne) ) then ...
Assignment Operators and Expressions The only valid assignment operator is the "=" (single equal sign) . This assignment operator can be used to assign numeric or string values to any variable. For example, the following assignments in Example 11 are all valid:
Example 11 local variantVar variantVar = 2 variantVar = 3.0 variantVar = "Eric"
The variable contains the last value assigned to it.
The expressions to the right of the "=" assignment operator can be complex and can also evaluate to a binary value. In this scripting language, binary values are stored as integers with '1' as true, '0' as false. See Example 12.
Example 12 local varOne, varTwo, result varOne = 10 varTwo = 5 result = ( (varOne/varTwo) == 2) println "Result is = "+ result <would print
"Result is = 1"> The following Example 13 shows the precedence order from top (highest) to bottom (lowest) of the expression operators .
Example 13
( ) (parenthesis always override other precendence rules)
* / (multiplication and division)
+ - (addition and subtraction)
< < = > >= (relational operator)
== <> (equality checking) And Or Not (logical operators)
= (assignment operator)
All operators on the same line are evaluated from left to right. All operations on a line higher than the line on which an operator is found will be evaluated before the operator in question. If you have any question about the precedence order of evaluation, use "( )" (parenthesis) to assure it is evaluated in the intended order. The following Example 14 shows how an expression would be evaluated based upon the above rules of order. Example 14 local numOne, numTwo, result numOne = 3; numTwo = 2 result = numOne + numTwo * numOne <result = 9>
Why is the result 9? The order of evaluation shows that all multiplication and division will be performed before addition and subtraction. Thus 'numTwo * numOne' is evaluated first, resulting 6, and then added to numOne last. So the default evaluation, if containing parenthesis, would look like the following Example 15.
Example 15 result = numOne + (numTwo * numOne)
Always use parenthesis whenever doubt exists about the order of evaluation.
Script output and String Operators The string operators in the IIR scripting language are very easy to use. Strings can be combined using the ' + ' operator. In addition, non-string variables will automatically be converted to their string equivalents by adding them to an existing string as shown by Example 16.
Example 16 local numVar, strVar, strVar2 numVar = 3 strVar - "This is a string, and a number" strVar2 = strVar + numVar <result would be
"This is a string, and a number 3"> Multiple strings and variables can be concatenated on the same line. In addition, the comparison operators defined above in the relational operators section can be used to determine the equality of two strings. Strings can be output in both the simulation and production modes. The output the simulation mode is directed to the small output window in the lower portion of the simulator window. The output appears on the production system if the output is left intact in the script. The location of the output will be the ICRS Console session.
The commands for producing output to the debug window and ICRS console are print and println . Both commands take string arguments or expressions that evaluate to strings. The print statement does not go to a new line after printing the string, but the pπntin statement does. The print and println functions are extremely valuable for debugging the simulator, but may result in cumbersome output to the screen on the production server. For this reason, consider commenting out all prmt/prmtln statements in the script after you are convinced of its correct operation.
For the production server, the prmt/prmtln can be a useful tool if common debugging statements are removed by only outputting those errors or events considered to be critical in nature. This method provides a real-time monitor of critical errors that can easily be monitored for activity.
One last form of output is via the l ogExpr function. This function works exactly like the println function with one difference: the destination of the output. The logExpr function's output is destined for the LOGn files in the \LOG subdirectory off of the simulator directory on the development system and off of the \ICRS directory on the production system.
Comments Comments exist on any line of the script. The pound sign ('#') precedes all comments and defines the remainder of the line as comments. The '#' can be placed at the end of a valid line of logic or declarations, such as shown above in the variable declaration section. Any information following the comment declaration symbol serves as comment only on that line.
The following lines of Example 17 are all valid examples of comments.
Example 17
#
# Script Name: <your scrιpt> #
# Description: <scrιpt descrιptιon> # global $0, $1 # $0 is the script name, $1 is the call identifier local hTelHandle # To hold telephony handle hTelHandle = ICRLAtoι($l) # Convert the telephony handle to numeric
In this example, notice that some of the comments are placed at the beginning of the line, while others follow valid scripting components such as variable declarations. Control Flow Statements and Blocks
Statements consist of a single logical expression or assignment, such as Example 18 below:
Example 18 varOne = varTwo * 3 println "VarOne now equals "+ varOne
Multiple expressions can exist on the same line if separated by a semicolon separator (;) . The separators provide a means of putting multiple short statements on a single line, as shown in the following Example 19:
Example 19 varOne = 3; varTwo = 6; varThree = 14
Except for this case, lines in the script do not need to terminate with a terminating symbol. Blocks of statements fall sequentially m the scripting language into groups dictated by the beginning and end of constructs. No specific block begin/end symbol exists, but each construct (such as the if-else-endif) has self-defining block definitions.
If-Else-Endif
The if-else-endif construct expressed decisions. The formal syntax is as shown below m Table 11: Table 11 if (expression) then <statement block 1> else
<statement block 2> endif
where the el se portion of the statement is optional. The expression is evaluated and if true, <statement block 1> is executed. If false, and the else portion is included, <statement block 2> is executed instead.
The <statement block n> may contain any combination of statements including more if-el se-endif constructs. The endif portion of the statement must always be specified to terminate the block of statements being executed for the given expression.
The following Example 20 illustrates a three-way decision that would require an if-else-endif construct embedded within the else statement block.
Example 20 if ((t pVal < 6) And (tmpVal <> 0) ) then <statement block 1> else if ( tmpVal == 0) then # tmpVal is 0
<statement blcok 2> else # tmpVal >= 6 and not zero <statement block 3> endif endif
Deeply nested if-else-endif statements can be cumbersome. If the test is simply to detect one of multiple values, the case statement may be a better operator as described below. Select Statement
The select statement shown by Table 12 tests whether an expression matches one of a number of constant integer or string values, and branches accordingly.
Table 12
Select Case expression Case <value> <statement block 1> End Case
Case <value2> <statement block 2> End Case
Case Else
<statement block n> End Case End Select
Each case s labeled by only one integer or string value constant. If a case matches the expression value, execution starts at that case and continues to the End Case statement. Each case value must be different, while the case labeled .Else is executed if none of the other cases are satisfied. Comparison values must either be integer values or strings (enclosed double quotes) and cannot be mixed within the same select statement. The El se case is optional. If this case is not present, and if none of the cases match, no action takes place.
Loops: For-Next and Do-Loop Until
Both the For-New and Do-Loop Until constructs provide a means of looping through multiple iterations of a statement block. The For-Next construct is preferable when there is a known number of iterations for the loop, while the Do-Loop Until construct is preferable when looping until a specific condition is met.
The syntax of the For-Next construct is shown by Table 13:
Table 13
ForCountVanable=StartToEndS epIncrement <statement block>
Next
In this syntax, Start and End indicate the beginning and ending increment value (for example, to loop from 1 to 20, Start would be 1 while .End would be 20) . The Increment value represents the step to take between iterations, normally 1.
The Example 21 below shows a For-Next statement followed by an increment other than 1. This loop would iterate 5 times even though the start and end are 1 and 21.
Example 21
For CountVarιable=l To 21 Step 4 <statement block>
Next
The other looping construct is the Do -Loop Unti l construct. As stated above, the Do-Loop Until construct is better suited to those conditions where the loop will terminate based upon a condition rather than a set number of iterations.
The Do-Loop Until syntax is shown by Table 14 as follows : Table 14
Do
<statement block> Loop Until (Expression)
The expression defined for this construct should evaluate to a Boolean expression, although it evaluates to true if the value is integer and non-zero.
Program Structure
At this point, you should be familiar with the basic language constructs and capabilities. This chapter combines this information with the functionality specific to an IIR script. More specifically, the sequence for a "standard"
IIR script could be as follows:
1. Receive a route request.
2. Obtain customer specific information from the route request. 3. Access a customer database using one or several of the route request fields as a key.
4. Determine the correct route.
5. Send back the route select event.
This sequence represents a "standard" IIR script, although all IIR scripts may not follow this exact flow.
Also, the actual logic varies for determining the appropriate route, depending on elements in the customer record and the specific routing task implemented.
The next section groups and describes the functions available for handling telephony, database, and miscellaneous tasks. IIR Function Categorization
This section groups the available IIR functions by process, lists all functions in that group by name, and provides a short description of the functions purpose. There are basically three logical groupings for the IIR functions. Tel ephony Event are those allowing read and write access to the Route Request/Select TSAPI events. Database Access are those functions providinςr access to the customer database. Miscellaneous Opera t i on are those functions supporting such features as date, t me, and string manipulation. Detailed information for each function is included in Section 5, Command Reference. Each function defined in the command reference includes a detailed description of the function along with examples of use for that function.
Telephony Event Functions
All of the telephony functions require that a "telephony handle" be passed to the call as the first parameter. This "telephony handle" is obtained at the beginning of the script using the global variable '$1' . The global variable '$1' represents the unique call identifier associated with this call and this instance of the running script. To obtain the telephony handle for this call, the ' $1' global variable must be passed into the ICRLAtoi function to convert it to an integer handle. This operation needs to be done only once at the beginning of an IIR script to provide access to all of the telephony event information.
The call to make to convert the '$1' call identifier into a numeric telphony handle appears as follows in Example 22: Exam le 22
SetRouteSelected (hTelHandle, "3333") # Route to extension 3333
SetPrioπtyCal ( hTelHandle, 0) # Set priority to off nRet=RouteFmal (hTelHandl) # return Route Select message if ( nRetoO) then println "error on Route Final in "+$0+ "of "+nRet endif
The telephony handle is valid from the point in the script that this call is made to the point where a RouteFinal or RouteUnknown is called. These functions inherently free the telephone handle in the system when they route the call. Any references to the telephone handle after invoking one of these functions will result m an error being returned.
In the above example, there are two Set fields which must be defined before performing the RouteFinal (mandatory components of the Route Final Request message) . These two fields are priori ty and routeDest which are set using SetPrioπ tyCall and SetRouteSel ected respectively. The route final request will fail if these two fields have not been set before the call to RouteFinal . Appendix C lists all telephony functions, including function types Get.Rte.Reg, Set-RteSeiect, and GetAgentSta te . Those functions with type GetRteReq access information from the Route Request message which initiates the scripts execution. Functions having type Set-RteSelect set fields in the Route Select message which is sent back to the ACD/PBX with routing instructions. Finally, GetAgentState functions obtain state information on specific ACD agents. For detailed information on a specific telephony functionn, look at the detailed entry for that function.
Database Access Functions
The general classification of database functions includes all functions used to access customer information from the server based database. All functions that access the database require a database handle. This database handle defines the current record location the database.
The database handle needs only to be created once at the beginning of the IIR script using the Crea teDBHandl e () function, and must be released before exiting the script using the DestroyDBHandle () function. The following script segment in Example 23 shows the calls necessary to allocate the database handle and release it upon completion of the script.
Example 23 local hDBHandle # Database handle variable local keyValue # Key to compare to database field local nRet # Return value from function call hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle if (hDBHandle == (0) then <mvalid database handle, error processmg> else key Value = " (214) -612-5100" nRet = RunQuery( hDBHandle, "phoneNumber", "=", key Value ) endif nRet = DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle)
The database handle is valid from the point in the script where the Crea teDBHandl e is called until the Des troyDBHandl e is called. The database handle must be released before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper resource management. Check the database handle returned from Crea teDBHandl e for a valid, non-zero value. A return value of 0 indicates that the system was unable to allocate access to the customer database and should be handled as an error condition.
The RunQuery function locates a record or records m the database. This function has four parameters: database handle, database field name, query operator (one of "<", ..<=.(/=f ..s...^ ">="), and key value to compare to database values in the specified field name. The following Example 24 illustrates the .RunQuery function:
Example 24
RunQuery( hDBHandle, "accountNo. ", ">=", "123456789") The literal string "accountNo" must be one of the field names defined through the database administration tool. This string is the field name stored in the database itself. The operator in this case is the literal string ">=" (greater than or equal to) , while the comparison key value is the literal string "123456789." This line directs IIR to locate the first record in the database organized by accountNo (ascending order) where "accountNo" is greater than or equal to "123456789." If the function returns 0, the query was successful. When a query has succeeded, the database handle represents the location of the record found. Various Set... and Get... field functions can then be used to update or read the customer's record. The RunQuery operation provides no combination logic, which means that no way exists of specifying that (fi el dl = KEY1 And fi eld2 <= KEY2) . If you require this type of logic, position the database handle on a record using the field comparison that will result in the fewest number of matches. For example, in the example above fiel dl = KEY1 would provide the most restrictive criteria.
Once the database pointer has been positioned on this record, all records that have fi el dl = KEY±' can be cycled through using the jMoveNextRecord function, v/hile comparing field2 for being <= Key2 manually in the script. That logic would look similar to the Example 25 below:
Example 25 nRet = RunQuery( hDBHandle, "fieldl", "=", "12345" if (nRet == 0) then
Do if (GetStringFieldValue( hDBHandle, "field2") «="6789") then
<process the customer record> Update Record ( hDBHandle) endif nRet = MoveNextRecord ( hDBHandle) fldlT p = GetStringFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "fieldl") Loop Until ( (nRetoO) And (fldlTmp == "12345") ) endif Always check the result of the RunQuery function call. If the result is non-zero, the query was unsuccessful and the current record is not defined. As mentioned above, you must test the second field separately. Use the function GetStrmgFieldValue in combination with the fι eld2 to check for the second condition (fι el d2 <= KEY2) .
The function MoveNextRecord moves the database handle to the next record in ascending order of the field used in the RunQuery invocation, in this case fi eldl . This next record must use fieldl as well as fι el d2 matching criteria. Although the query positions you at a matching record, it does not guarantee that the next or previous record match the same criteria, particularly in the case of the equal "=" comparison operator.
The MoveNextRecord and MovePrevi ousRecord operate according to the field index files stored with the database.
These index files organize the field values in ascending order. In Example 26, a fieldl index file might appear as:
Example 26
11111 12121 12345 15555 21221 33221 ...
In this example, the field index file has organized the values into ascending numerical order forfieldl . The key field value "12345 " appears in this list, with no duplicates of this entry. For this example, the MoveNextRecord would result in the record having fieldl value "15555" as the current record, showing the necessity to check the primary key each move operation when the operator is "=". As shown in the previous paragraph, the "=" (equal to) operator requires a retest of the primary criteria on each move. This requirement is not true, however, for the remaining operators ("<", "<=", ">, and ">=") due to the nature of their comparison. Because the index file is organized in ascending order, these operators guarantee that the next or previous element m sequential order will satisfy the criteria (assuming you have not reached the beginning or end of the index file) . When using the move functions (MoveNextRecord and
MovePrevi ousRecord) , you must consider how their use relates to the comparison operator used in tne RunQt ery statement. In the example index file from above which uses an operator of ">" (greater than) and a key value of "125 45 " , the first element to satisfy this query would be "15555 " . Using the MoveNextRecord would place you at "21221", and so forth.
If you use the operator "< " (less than) and a key value of "12345 ", the operation will place the database handle position at key "12121", the first element less than the key value "12345 " . In this case the MovePrevi ousRecord would be the correct function to move to the next record that meets the "<" (less than) criteria. The following Table 15 summarizes the relationship between the operator and the correct move function to use. In adcition, whether or not the user needs to retest for the primary criteria on each move is defined for each operator. Table 15
Figure imgf000101_0001
Appendix C, "Command Reference, " contains a summary of all database functions. This summary includes function types Database and all functions that can operate on a database, as well as a short description of operation an syntax.
Miscellaneous and System Functions
The classification of miscellaneous functions includes access to time and date information from the system. All functions accessing the time information require a time handle. The time handle need only be created once at the beginning of the IIR script using the CreateTimeHandle ( ) function, and must be released before exiting the script using the DestroyTimeHandle () function. The following script segment in Example 27 shows the calls necessary to allocate the time handle and release it upon completion of the script.
Example 27 local hTimeHandle # Time handle variable local nRet # Return value form function call hTιmeHandle=CreateTιmeHandleθ if (hTimeHandle==0) then <hTιmeHandle is invalid, error processιng> else nRet = GetCurrentTime (hTimeHandle) println "Current date and time is:" + G tAscTime ( hTimeHandle 0
endif nRet = DestroyTi eHandle (hDBHandle)
The time handle is valid form the point the script where the Crea teTimeHandle is called until the DestroyTimeHandl e is called. The time handle must be released before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper resource management. It is important to check the time handle returned from CreateTimeHandl e for a valid, non-zero value. A return value of 0 indicates that :he system was unable to allocate a time handle. Once the time handle is obtained successfully, the user must use the GetCurrent Time function to actually update the instance time and date data. This call must be made each time the time and date information needs to be refreshed. System functions are those inherent functions with the
ICRL prefix. These functions currently include string manipulation functions such as ICRLStrLen .
A summary of all time functions can be found m Appendix D, including function types Mi scTime and System . For detailed information on a specific miscellaneous or system function, see the detailed entry for that function in the command reference section.
Guidelines to Follow This chapter has now defined all primary script components, including the scripting language constructs and all available functions. Please be certain that you have read and understood this information before you continue. The following section explains the components of a standard script. A standard script includes access to information from the Route Request message, comparison of this data to that stored in the customer database, and finally a determination of where to route the call. The following call center scenario will be helpful in understanding the script example.
A credi t card issuer wants to take away the laborious task of manually verifying new credi t cards issued through the use of cagents . The issuer determines that a match on the caller 's ANI (Automatic Number Identification, or simply put , the number from which they are calling) to the phone number in the customer da tabase is suffici ent for verificati on purposes, and can he a utoma ted using the IIR.
The IIR recei ves the adj unct route request , performs a lookup on the ANI information , and, if a ma tch lsvfound, updates the customer 's record to reflect verification on the card. If a match is not found, the IIR uses the RouteMore capabili ty to prompt the caller to enter other verifica tion data (social securi ty number, birth da te, etc. ) . Example 28 on the following page represents the IIR script that would handle these requirements. The example breaks down "blocks" of the script, A through G. The text following the example defines important issues for each section and describes the logic associated with that section. Example 28
A. global $l-$0 $1 Is the call Identifier
$0 the script name local hTelHandle, hDBHandle # declare vars for DB and tel handles local queryRet, nRet, rteRet local ANIValue # ANI returned from tel call # declare vars to be used as constants local RETOK NOT FOUND, INVALID_HNDL, FAIL
RTE, QUERY_SSN local VALID_VDN
B. # Initialize values for constants in the script RETOK = 0 INVALID_HNDL=0; FAIL_RTE="3000"
QUERY_SSN = "3100"; VALID_VDN="3200"
# Create DataBase and Telephone handles hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
C. # Verify validity of database and telephony handles before proceeding If (hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL Or hTelHandle ==
INVALID_HNDL) then SetRouteSelected (hTelHandle, FAIL_RTE_; Set PriorityCall (hTelHandle), (0) rteRet = RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) else # valid handles, proceed with card verification
D. # the following line queries the DB for a match on "PhoneNo" field to ANI query Ret = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "PhoneNo",
GetCallingDevice ( hTelHandle) )
# If the Query did not return OK, no match was found, try different KEY If ( query Ret=RETOK) then
# Perform a RouteMore to a VDN that queries user to enter SSN SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, QUERY SSN); SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle 0) RouteMore ( hTelHandle) #try to locate the record by social secuirty num collected via Route More query Ret =RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "SSN", "m" (GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle)) #If the SSN query does not match route to default hunt group If (query Ret <> RETOK) then
SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, FAIL_Rte); SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) rteRet = RouteFinal ( hTelHandle) endif endif
# If query Ret was successful, then we want to set VALIDATION and route to
# VDN that will play mesage telling customer verification is complete.
E. If (queryRet=RETOK) then SetStrmgFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "Verification",
"COMPLETE") nRet = UpdateRecord ( hDBHandle) If (nRetoRETOK) then println "Error In" + $0 + "updating DB record, Err=" [?] +nRef
SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, FAIL_RTE) ;
SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) rteRet = UpdateRecord ( hDBHandle ) else SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, FAIL_RTE) ; Set
Priority Call ( hTelHandle, 0) rteRet = RouteFinal ( hTelHandle) else
SetRouteSelectedChTel handle, VALID VDN; Set Priority Call (hTelHandle, 0) rteRte=RouteFinal (hTelHandle) endif endif If ( rteRET <> RETOK) then println "Error In" + $0 + "routing call, Err="+ rteRet endif endif
F. DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle )
The text below refers to the uppercase Letters at the left margin of each block in the diagram.
Block A - Variable Declaration
This block declares the global and local variables. The global variables $1 and $0 are system-defined parameters that exist for every script execution. The variables are accessible by a script through the gl obal declaration: global $1 , $0. The variable $1 is a text string containing the call identifier assigned to it by the IIR when the Route Request message is received. This identifier obtains the telephony handle later in the script (the teLephony handle is simply a numeric version of this identifier) . The variable $0 is the script name. The script can use this variable for output to identify the script related to errors or diagnostics. Items to note m this block include the declaration of variables to be used as constants (all variables defined with all capitals) . These variables appear n uppercase the example to make them easy to identify as constants in the script, but uppercase is not required.
Block B - Variable Initialization / Resource Handle
Acquisition
This block begins with variable initialization and defines the "constants, " which is a good coding practice for maintainability. The constants defined here are used to compare against return values from functions, as well as defining standard route values used throughout the script. Also notice the use of the semicolon between commands, allowing multiple commands to be placed on the same line.
The second half of this block deals with obtaining handles to the database and telephony event information. The telephony event handle is obtained by converting the call identifier ($1 ) to a numeric value. The database handle is created by invoking Crea teDBHandl e () .
Block C - Validate Resource Handles This block describes the validation of the resource handles obtained (telephony and database, this case) .
The handles are tested against the defined constant INVALID
_ HNDL, and if either of the handles are invalid, the script attempts to perform a final routing of the call to an extension on the switch which might be an ACD queue for general call handling.
The RouteFinal is preceded by the SetRouteSel ected and
SetPriori tyCall functions, which set mandatory fields the
Route Select message to send to the switch. If these two functions are not called preceding the RouteFinal , the call will not be routed successfully. The SetRouteSelected places the destination extension into the message while the
SetPri ori tyCall places the priority of the Route Select message (0 or 1) .
Block D - DB Query / RouteMore
This block displays the database query and the
RouteMore function which are used when the initial query fails. The purpose of the RunQuery call is to determine a match between the customer's ANI (obtained via GetCallmgDevice) and the "PhoneNo " field in the database. The result of the operation will be zero (0) if a match is found. In this example, if the return from the query is non-zero (no record matches the caller's ANI) , a secondary method verifies the account.
The secondary method attempts to match on social security number, which requires prompting and subsequent DTMF input by the caller. The RouteMore command gives control back to a VDN on the switch, whι„e maintaining position in the current IIR script. By setting the selected route to a VDN containing prompting, digit collection (SetRouteSelected (h TelHandl e, QUERY_SSN) , and a subsequent adjunct route, you can wait for the second Route Request message and pick up in the IIR script after the RouteMore command.
The second RunQuery operation in th.s block uses information from the Route Request message as a result of the VDN that prompted for SSN digits. This example uses Roul eMore only once, but the number of times that the IIR script can pass control back to a VDN on the switch is unlimited, as long as the VDN to which con:rol is passed performs an adjunct route at some point in its processing.
The second RunQuery looks for a match between the field
"SSN" m the database and the digits collected m the QUERY_SSN VDN. If the return from the query this time is not successful, the script routes to the default FAIL_RTE extension.
Block E - Update DB Record / Route Final This block handles the case where either of the two database queries succeeded performed in Block D above. In this case the customer's record is updated to reflect the verification of the account, and the user is transferred to a VDN that notifies the caller of the verification.
The SetStringFi eldVal ue function sets the Veri fi ca ti on field in the database for the customer to COMPLETE. After modifying this field, the record is updated m the database using the Upda teRecord functi on . If the update is successful, the call is routed to the VDN that plays a message notifying the caller of the successful validation, otherwise the caller is sent to the FAIL_RTE extension for general call handling.
Block F - Release Resource Handles
This block is always executed, just as the creation of the database and telephony handles is m Block B. At this point, all resources allocated in the script must be released. The DestroyDBHandl e function releases the database handle. The h TelHandl e is automatically released when a RouteFinal operation is encountered.
The remainder of this chapter, Table 16, is a quick reference for scripting commands. The details for the commands are in Appendix C, "Command Reference."
TABLE 16
Command Summary
o
CD
Figure imgf000110_0001
o
Figure imgf000111_0001
Figure imgf000112_0001
Figure imgf000113_0001
)
Figure imgf000114_0001
Figure imgf000115_0001
Figure imgf000116_0001
t_π
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000118_0001
-J
Figure imgf000119_0001
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
O
Figure imgf000122_0001
M
Figure imgf000123_0001
t )
Figure imgf000124_0001
M l
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000127_0001
cn
Appendix C, "Command Reference, " provides a detailed description with examples for each of these commands.
APPENDIX A - COMMAND REFERENCE The commands in this section are presented in alphabetical order. Each command begins on a new page to make reference easier. For a quick summary only, see the previous section. Function Cl earRecord
The ClearRecord function removes a record in the database that has been located through the -RunQuery or MoveNextRecord/MovePreviousRecord functions. Syntax destVariable = ClearRecord (hDBHandle) Part Description destVariable Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call. hDBHandle Variable that receives the allocated database handle
Return Value
Returns 0 if successful, for an invalid database handle the function returns -5008. This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Some of the more common errors returned by Btrieve are covered in the IIR trouble shooting guide.
Remarks
The ClearRecord function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the Crea teDBHandle function, and a "current" record being defined through the RunQuery function call.
Note that after the record has been cleared, the current database record associated with the hDBHandl e is undefined, and therefore any access to record data before another RunQuery call will result in an error.
Example - ClearRecord [vanabl e declara ti ons ]
INVALID_HNDL = 0; RET0K=0 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle!) hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1) # If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if (hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL) then perform default route processing else nRet = RunQuery(hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=",
GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) ) # If the Query returned return OK, then delete the record from the database if (nRet == RETOK ) then if (ClearRecord ( hDBHandle ) <> RETOK ) then process error on deleting record endif endif endif
DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle )
Function CreateDBHandle
The CreateDBHandle function allocates a database handle from the resource manager, and provides the means to access and update database related information through the database related functions.
Syntax hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( )
Part Description hDBHandl e Variable that receives the allocated database handle Return Value
On failure, this function returns an integer value of 0 if the resource manager is unable to allocate a database handle.
Remarks
The Crea teDBHandl e function provides the access mechanism for all database related functions. The CreateDBHandl e function is closely related to another of the database functions, Des troyDBHandl e .
The DestroyDBHandl e function must be called before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper maragement of the database handle resources. The allocation of a αatabase handle does not locate a record within the database. Before performing any database record reads, updates, or deletions, the RunQuery function must be called successfully. Example - CreateDBHandle
[variable declara tions] INVALID_HNDL = 0 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if (hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL) then perform defaul t route processing else nRet = RunQuery( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=", GetIVRDιgιts( hTelHandle ) )
# If the Query returned return OK, then print out the customer information if ( nRet == RETOK) then
IstName = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "LastNa e") frstName = GetSt mgFieldValαe (hDBHandle, "FirstName") delCount = GetNumericFieldValue (hDBHandle, "DelinqCount") process caller based upon delinquent count and log if delinquent > 3 if (delCount > 3) then prntln "Customer"+lstName+", "+frstName+" has del = ΑdelCount endif endif endif DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle;
Function Create Time Handl e The CreateTimeHandle function allocates a time handle from the resource manager, and provides the means to access time/date related information through the Get time/date related functions.
Syntax hTimeHandle = CreateTimeHandle ( ) Part Description h TimeHandle Variable that receives the time handle
Return Value
On failure, this function returns a value of 0 if the resource manager cannot allocate a time handle.
Remarks
The CreateTimeHandl e function provides the access mechanism for all time and date related functions such as GetHour, GetDayOf Month , etc. The Crea teTimeHandle function is closely related to two of the other time resource functions, DestroyTimeHandle, and GetCurrent Time . The DestroyTimeHandl e function must be called before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper management of the time handle resources. A call to GetCurrentTime after obtaining the time handle is necessary to obtain/update the time and date related information. All of the time/date Get... functions obtain their information based upon the most recent call to GetCurrent Time .
Example - CreateTimeHandle [variabl e declara ti ons ]
RETOK = 0 INVALID_HNDL = 0
# Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTιmeHandle ( )
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID_HNDL) then # obtain the time data information
GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is: " + GetAscTime ( hTimeHandle) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; mm =
GetM ute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond(hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss: " + hr +":" + mm +" : "+ sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is: " + mo + "/" + day + "/"+ yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek
(hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) :" +
GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year:" + GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle)
DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle ) endif Function DestroyDBHandl e
The DestroyDBHandle function frees a database handle back to the resource manager. This function is paired with the Crea teDBHandl e function, which allocates the database handle at the beginning of an IIR script.
Syntax destVariabl e = DestroyDBHandl e (hDBHandl e) Part Description destVariable Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call hDBHandle Parameter that is the database handle in the script
Return Value
If successful, this function returns 0. For an invalid database handle, this function returns an integer value of -5008.
Remarks
The DestroyDBHandle function must be called before exiting the IIR script to ensure proper management of the database handle resources, if a database handle has been allocated using the Crea teDBHandle function before that point in the script.
Example - DestroyDBHandle
[variable declara tions]
INVALID_HNDL = 0 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if ( hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL) then perform defa ul t rou t e processing else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=", GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) ) # If the Query returned return OK, then print out the customer information if ( nRet == RETOK) then
IstName = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "LastName") frstName = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle,
"FirstName") delCount = GetNumericFieldValue (hDBHandle, "DelinqCount") process call er based upon del inquent coun t and l og i f del i nquen t > 3 if (delCount > 3) then println "Customer"+lstName+", "+frstName+" has del = "+delCount endif endif endif DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle)
Function Des troyTime Handl e
The DestroyTimeHandle function frees a time handle back to the resource manager. This function is paired with the Createrimeifanc.Je function which allocates the time handle at the beginning of an IIR script.
Syntax destVari abl e = DestroyTimeHandl e (h TimeHandl e) Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call. h TimeHandl e Variable that receives the time handle
Return Value This function returns a value of 0 if successful; -5008 if invalid.
Remarks
The DestroyTimeHandle function must be called before you exit the IIR script to ensure proper management of the time handle resources if a time handle has been allocated using the CreateTimeHandle function before that point the script.
Example - DestroyTimeHandle [variable decl ara ti ons ]
RETOK = 0 INVALID_HNDL = 0
# Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTιmeHandle
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID_HNDL) then
# obtain the time data information
GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle) println "The current time is: " + GetAscTime hTimeHandle) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle) mm =
GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond (hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss: " + hr + ":"
+ mm + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle ) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is: " + mo + "/"
+ day + "/" + yr println "Day of week: " ÷GetDayOfϊ\eek ( hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (Or/Off) : " +
GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year:" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) nRet = DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHardle ) endif
Function GetAgent Availabl e
The GetAgentAvailable function returns either true or false (1,0) depending upon the state of the agent information obtained through the QueryAgentSta te call. The agent available state is a combination of the agent state and the agent talk state where the agent is ready and the talk state is idle. Syntax destVariable = GetAgentAvailabl e ( h TelHandl e )
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the state of the agent availability. hTel /Handl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value This function returns an integer value that represents the available state of the agent defined in a previously executed QueryAgentState call. If the telephony handle is invalid, this function returns - 4001. Remarks
This function is dependent upon the agent information obtained in the QueryAgentSta te function call. This function will return an error if the QueryAgentSt te function has not been called with to obtain the agent state information for the specific agent.
Example - GetAgentAvailable [variabl e decl ara ti ons]
SKILL _HUNT = "2800" hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# "3600" represents a specific agents login-ID nRet = QueryAgentState ( hTelHandle, "3600",
SKILL_HUNT) if (GetAgentAvailable ( hTelHandle ) ) then send caller to this specfic agent else send caller to general queue for handling endif
Function GetAgentState
The GetAgentState function returns the "ready" state of a given agent based upon the agent information obtained through the QueryAgentState call. This represents the agentState field from the Query Agent State Service message.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetAgentState (hTelHandle)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the agent
"ready" state, possible values are as follows:
AG_NOT_RE.ADY - Agent is not ready to receive calls 1 = AG_NULL - Agent is not logged in on specified device/split
2 = AG_READY - Agent s available for calls or talking
3 = AG_WORK_NOT_READY - After call work occupied h TelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1) function call.
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the agent "ready" state base upon the most recently executed QueryAgentSta te call. If the telephony handLe is invalid, this function returns - 4001.
Remarks
This function is dependent upon the agent information obtained in the QueryAgentSta te function call. This function will return an error if the QueryAgentSta te function has not been called with to obtain the agent state information for the specific agent.
Example - GetAgentState [variabl e declara tions]
SKILL_HUNT ="2800"; AG_READY = 2; TS_IDLE = 1 hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1) "3600" represents a specific agents login-ID
= QueryAgentState ( hTelHandle, "3600", SKILL_HUNT) agState = GetAgentState ( hTelhandle ) agTalkState = GetAgentTalkState ( hTelHandle ) if { agState ==AG_RE.ADY .And agTalkState == TS_IDLE ) then send caller to this specific agent else send caller to general queue for handling endif Function GetAgentTalkSta te
The GetAgentTalkState function returns the talk state of an agent based upon the agent information obtained through the QueryAgentSta te call. This represents the talkState field from the Query Agent State Service message.
Syntax destVariable = GetAgentState ( h TelHandl e) Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the agent talk state, possible values are as follows : 0 = TS_ON_CALL - Agent is currently talking to a caller 1 = TS_IDLE - Agent is waiting for a caller hTelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1) function call.
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the agent talk state base upon the most recently executed QueryAgentSta te call. If the telephony handle is invalid, this function returns - 4001.
Remarks
This function is dependent upon the agent information obtained in the QueryAgentSta te function call. This function will return an error if the QueryAgentSta te function has not been called with to obtain the agent state information for the specific agent. The agents talkSta te is only defined when the agentSta te is AG_READY. See GetAgentSta te for details on agentState.
Example - GetAgentTalkState [variable declarations]
SKI L_HUNT = "2800"; AG_READY = 2; TS_IDLE = 1 hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# "3600" represents a specific agents login-ID nRet = QueryAgentState( hTelHandle, "3600", SKILL_HUNT) agState = GetAgentState ( hTelhandle ) agTalkState = GetAgentTalkState ( hTelHandle) if ( agState ==AG_READY And agTalkState == TS_IDLE ) then send caller to this specfic agent else send caller to general queue for handling endif
Function GetAgentWorkMode The GetAgentWorkMode function returns the work mode of a given agent based upon the agent information obtained through the QueryAgentSta te call. This represents the workMode field from the Query Agent State Service message.
Syntax destVariable = GetAgentWorkMode (h TelHandl e) Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the agent work mode, possible values are as follows:
1 = WM_AUX_WORK
2 = WM_AFTCAL_WK
3 = WM_AUTO_IN
4 = WM MANUAL IN h TelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the agent work mode based upon the most recently executed QueryAgentSta te call. If the telephony handle is invalid, this function returns - 4001.
Remarks
This function is dependent upon the agent information obtained in the QueryAgen tSta t e func ti on call. This function will return an error if the QueryAgentSta te function has not been called with to obtain the agent state information for the specific agent.
Example - GetAgentWorkMode
[vari abl e declara ti ons]
SKILL_HUNT ="2800"; AG _ READY = 2; TS_IDLE -= 1 hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# "3600" represents a specific agents login-I D nRet = QueryAgentState ( hTelHandle, "3600",
SKILL_HUNT) agState = GetAgentState ( hTelhandle) agTalkState = GetAgentTalkState ( hTelHandle ) wkMode = GetAgentWorkMode ( hTelHandle ) if ( agState ==AG_READY .And agTalkState == TS_IDLE then send caller to thi s specifi c agent else send call er to general queue for handling endif Function GetAscTime
The GetAscTime function returns a string containing the current date and time in the format "Thu Oct 12 09:00:40 1995" based upon the date and time of the last call to GetCurrentTime in the IIR script.
Syntax destVanable = GetAscTime (h Timehl andl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving string that is
.ASCII date and time. The data is returned m the format "Thu Oct 12 09:00:40 1995". h TimeHandl e Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandl e call.
Return Value If successful, this function returrs the string containing the formatted time and date. If unsuccessful, a zero length string will be returned (NULL string.)
Remarks Allocate the time handle by calling Crea teTimeHandl e and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrentTime before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurrentTime in the script.
Example - GetAscTime
[variabl e declara ti ons]
RETOK = 0 INVALID HNDL = 0 # Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTimeHandle ( )
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID HNDL) then
# obtain the fime data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is : " + GetAscTime ( hTimeHandle ) hr = GetHour (hTimeHandle) ; min =
GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond (hrimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss "+ hr + ":" + min + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is: " + mo + "/"
+ day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWee ( hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) : " + GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year:" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle: ( hTimeHandle) endif
Function GetCallingDevice
The GetCallingDevice function returns the calling device number (extension or phone number) of the originating party. For calls that originate on-PBX, or incoming calls over PRI facilities, the calling device number is returned. No information is returned by this command for incoming calls over non-PRI lines, however, the Trunk Group Number is available from the GetTrunk command. This parameter is obtained from the Route Request Service message (Version 2), callingDevi ce field. Syntax destVariabl e = GetCallingDevice (hTelHandle)
Part Description des tVariabl e Variable that receives the string returned from this function. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns a string expression that represents the calling device extension/number. If the return value is a zero length string, no callmgDevi ce information was received for this call. If the telephony handle is not valid, this function returns the string "NULL_POINTER" .
Remarks The callmgDevice field in the Route Request Service message is an optional component of this message, therefore it may not exist for each call. This field, for calls incoming over PRI facilities is the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) value. The callmgDevi ce field is mutually exclusive with the trunk field accessed through the GetTrunk function. This means one or the other of callmgDevi ce or trunk are available in the message, but never both.
Example - GetCallingDevice [variabl e declara tions]
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) ANI = GetCallingDevice ( hTelHandle ) # checking for a zero length string determines whether the field is in the message if (ANI <> "") then println "The calling device (ANI) is = "+ .ANI else
# the trunk data will be available when the calling device isn't trunkID = GetTrunk( hTelHandle ) println "The inbound trunk group ID = "+ trunkID endif
Function GetCurrent Time
The GetCurrentTime function sets or refreshes the current date and time associated with the specified time handle. All Get... time and date functions receive information based upon the last invocation of this function.
Syntax destVari abl e = GetCurren t Time (h TimeHandl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving integer specifying success/failure of call. h TimeHandle Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandl e call .
Return Value
If successful, this function returns 0; if invalid time handle, this function a value of -5008.
Remarks A call to GetCurrentTime after obtaining the time handle is necessary to obtam/update the time and date related information. All of the time/date Get... functions obtain their information based upon the most recent call to GetCurrent Time . Allocate the time handle by calling
Crea teTimeHandl e before calling this function.
Example - GetCurrentTime
[variable declara tions]
RETOK = 0 INVALID_HNDL = 0 # Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTimeHandle ( )
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID_HNDL) then
# obtain the time data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle) println "The current time isA' + GetAscTime ( hTimeHandle) hr = GetHour( hTimeHandle ) ; min =
GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecon (hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:nm:sε " + hr + " : " + min + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=Getyear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is: "+ mo + "/" +day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek ( hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) : " + GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year:"+
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle) endif Function GetDayOfMonth
The GetDayOfMonth function returns an integer representing the current day of the month (1 -31) based upon the most recent call to GetCurren t Time within the script.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetDayOfMon th (h TimeHandl e)
Part Description destVariable Variable receiving an integer that is the current day of the month (1
-31.) hTimeHandle Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandl e call .
Return Value
If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current day of the month. If invalid, the function returns -5008.
Remarks
It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling
Crea teTimeHandle and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrentTime before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurren t Time the script.
Example - GetDayOfMonth [variable declarations]
RETOK = 0 INVALID_HNDL = 0 # Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTιmeHandle ( ) # make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID_HNDL) then
# obtain the time data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is:" + GetAscTime ( hTimeHandle) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; min = GetMmute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond(hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss: "+ hr + ":"
+ mm + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) printIn "From components, date is:" + mo + "/"
+ day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek (hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) : " +
GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year:" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle: ( hTimeHandle ) endif
Function GetDayOfWeek
The GetDayOfWeek function returns an integer representing the current day of the week (1-7) ; the base or first day (1) being Sunday, based upon the most recent call to GetCurrentTime within the script.
Syntax destVariable = GetDayOfWeek ( h TimeHanαl e ) Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving an integer that is the current day of the week (1 -7) where the first day of the week is Sunday (I =Sunday, 2=Monday, etc.) h TimeHandl e Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandl e call .
Return Value
If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current day of the week; if invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
Remarks
It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling Crea teTimeHandl e and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrent Time before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurrentTime in the script.
Example - GetDayOfWeek
[variable declara tions] RETOK = 0
INVALID HΝDL = 0
# Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTιmeHandle ( )
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> IΝVALID_HΝDL) then
# obtain the time data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is:" + GetAscTime (hTimeHandle) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; mm = GetM ute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond (hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss:" + hr + ":" + min + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr-GetYear (hTimeHandle) prntln "From components, date is:" + mo + ":" + day
+ "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek ( hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) :" +
GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year:" + GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle ) endif
Function GetDayOfYear
The GetDayOfYear function returns an integer representing the current day of the year (1-366); the base or first day January 1 (l=Jan 1) based upon the most recent call to GetCurrentTime within the script.
Syntax destVariable = GetDayOf Year (h TimeHandl e)
Part Description destVanabl e Variable receiving an integer that is the current day of the year (I -366) where the first day of the year is Jan 1 (1 =Jan 1.) h TimeHandl e Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandl e call.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current day of the year. For the case of an invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
Remarks
It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling Crea teTimeHandl e and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrentTime before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurren t Time in the script.
Example - GetDayOfYear [variabl e declarations]
RETOK = 0 INVALID_HNDL = 0 # Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTimeHandle ( )
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID_HNDL) then
# obtain the time data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is)" + GetAscTime ( hTimeHandle ) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; min =
GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond(hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss : " + hr + " :" + min + ":" + sec mo = GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is:" mo + "/" + day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek
(hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) : " + GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year:" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle ) endif Function GetDst
The GetDst function returns an integer representing the current status of daylight savings time ( on or off) . This information is based upon the most recent call to GetCurrent Time within the script. Syntax destVariabl e = GetDst ( h TimeHandl e )
Part Description des tVariable Variable receiving an integer that is the state of daylight savings
Figure imgf000152_0001
hTimeHandle Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teT-.meHandl e call.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current daylight savings time state. For the case of an invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
Remarks
It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling
Crea teTimeHandle and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrentTime before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurrent Time m the script.
Example - GetDst [vanabl e declarations]
RETOK = 0 INVALIDJHNDL = 0 # Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTimeHandle ( ) # make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID_HNDL) then
# obtain the time data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is : " + GetAscTime (hTimeHandle ) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; min = GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond(hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss: " + hr + ":
+ min + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is : " + mo +
"/" + day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek (hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) : " +
GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year:" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle ) endif
Function GetHour The GetHour function returns an integer representing the current hour based upon the most recent call to GetCurrentTime within the script.
Syntax des tVariabl e = GetHour ( h TimeHandl e )
Part Description destVariable Variable receiving an integer that is the current hour (0-23) h TimeHandle Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandl e call. Return Value
If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current hour. For the case of ai invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
Remarks
It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling
Crea teTimeHandl e and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrent Time before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurren t Time in the script.
Example - GetHour
[variable declara tions]
RETOK = 0 INVALID HNDL = 0
# Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreatTimeHandle ( )
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID_HNDL) then # obtain the time data information
GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is : " + GetAscTime ( hTimeHandle ) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; min
GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond (hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss : " + hr + " : " + min + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth(hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is : " + mo + "/" + day + "/" + yr println "Day of week : " +GetDayOfWeek
(hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Offl
GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle) endif
Function Getlncoming UUIDa ta
The GetlncomingUUIPata function returns the user-to- user information data. The type of user-to-user information, obtained through the GetlncommgUUIType , indicates the presence of user-to-user information (UUI) including the UUI Data.
Syntax destVariable = GetlncomingUUIDa ta (h TelHandl e)
Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the string representing the UUI Data. hTelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns a string value that represents the user-to-user information data. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns the string "NULL_POINTER" .
Remarks
The userinfo.type, accessed through the function
GetlncomingUUIType , determines whether or not any user-to- user information actually exist. If the userinfo type is none (-1), there is no user-to-user information for this call.
All userinfo parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements. The specific field in the Route Request message (Version 2) is private data ATTUserToUserlnfo . da ta , val ue .
Example - GetlncomingUUIData [variabl e declara ti ons ]
NO UUI = -1; UUI ASCII = 4
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
# check to see if the caller entered the expected
DTMF digits if (GetlncommgUUIType ( hTellHandle == NO_UUI ) then
Process without user-to-user information else uuiLen = GetlncommgUUILength ( hTelHandle ) uuiData = GetlncomingUUIData ( hTelHandle ) if ( uuiLen == 9 ) then
Process the uuiDa ta as a SSN from adj acent
Figure imgf000156_0001
endif endif
Function GetlncommgUUILength
The GetlncommgUUILength function returns the user-to- user information length. The type of user-to-user information, obtained through the GetlncommgUUIType, indicates the presence of user-to-user information (UUI) including the UUI Length. Syntax destVariabl e = Getlnco ingUUILength (h TelHandl e)
Part Description des tVari abl e Variable that receives the integer representing the UUI Length. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the user-to-user information length. For an invalid telephony handle, the error -4001 (TELERR_INVALID_TEL_HANDLE) is returned.
Remarks
The userinfo type, accessed through the function GetlncomingUUl Type , determines whether or not any user-to- user information actually exists. If the userinfo type is none (-1), no user-to-user information for this call.
All userinfo parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements. The specific field in the Route Request message (Version 2) is private data ATTUserToUserlnfo . data . l ength .
Example - GetlncomingUUILength [vanabl e declara ti ons] NO_UUI = -1; UUI_ASCII = 4
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
# check to see if the caller entered the expected
DTMF digits if (GetlncommgUUIType ( hTelHandle ) == NO_UUI then
Process wi thout user- to-user informa ti on else uuiLen = GetlncomingUUILength ( hTelHandle ) uuiData = GetlncomingUUIData ( hTellHandle ) if ( uuiLen == 9 ) then
Process the uuiDa ta a s a SSN from adjacen t
Figure imgf000158_0001
endif endif
Function GetlncommgUUIType
The GetlncommgUUIType function returns the user-to- user informabon type. The type of user-to-user information indicates the presence of user-to-user information (UUI) and the format of the data portion of the message.
Syntax destVariable GetlncommgUUIType (h TelHandl e)
Part Description des tVariabl e Variable that receives the integer representing the UUI Type.
-1 UUI_NONE (No UUI data specified)
0 UUIJJSER SPECIFIC
1 UUI_IA5_ASCII h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1) function call.
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the user-to-user information type. For an invalid telephony handle, the error -4001 (TELERR_INVALID_TEL_HANDLE) is returned. Remarks
The userinfo.type determines whether or not any user- to-user information actually exist. If the userinfo type is none (-1), there is no user-to-user information for this call.
All userinfo parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements.
The specific field in the Route Request message (Version 2) is private data ATTUserToUserlnfo. type .
Example - GetlncommgUUIType [variabl e declara ti ons ]
NO UUI = -1; UUI ASCII = 4
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) # check to see if the caller entered the expected
DTMF digits if (GetlncommgUUIType ( hTelHandle ) NO UUI then
Process wi thou t user- to - user informa ti on else uuiLen = GetlncommgUUILength { hTelHandle ) uuiData = GetlncomingUUIData ( hTelHandle ) if ( uuiLen == 9 ) then Process the uuiDa ta as a SSN from adj acen t
Figure imgf000159_0001
endif endif
Function GetlVRColl ectVDN
The GetlVRCollectVDΝ function returns the VDΝ that collected the code/digits entered by the caller through the G3 call prompting feature or the collected digits feature. Syntax destVariabl e = GetlVRCol l ectVDN ( h TelHandle )
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the string representing the VDN which collected the code/digits m the userEnteredCode data. hTelHandle Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns a string value that represents the VDN having collected the user entered code/digits. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns the string "NULL_POINTER" .
Remarks
The userEnteredCode type determines whether or not any code/digits actually exist and whether a CollectVDN exists. If the userEnteredCode type is none (-1), no user-entered code/digits exist for this call. All userEnteredCode parameters in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements. The specific field in the Route Request message (Version 2) is private data ATTUserEnteredCc de . coll ectVDN.
Example - GetlVRCollectVDN
[variable declara tions] NO_IVRDIGITS = -1; COLLECTED=0; ENTERED=1
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) # check to see if the caller entered the expected
DTMF digits if (GetlVRType (hTelHandle) == NO IVRDIGITS) then Route to operator else if (GetlVRIndicator ( hTelHandle ) == COLLECTED) then
IVRDigits = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) collectVDN = GetlVRCollectVD (hTelHandle) if (collectVDN == "3200") then Process IVR Di gi t s as Soci al Securi ty
Number else if (collectVDN == "3300") then
Process IVR Digi ts as Accoun t Number endif endif endif endif
Function GetJVRPigi s
The GetlVRDigits function returns the user collected code/digits. This data is that entered by the user through collect digit commands in vector processing on the G3 switch.
Syntax destVariable = GetlVRDigi ts (h TelHandl e)
Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the string representing the user entered code/digits . hTelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns a string value that represents the user collected code/digits. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns the string "NULL POINTER". Remarks
The userEnteredCode type determines whether or not any code/digits actually exist. If the userEnteredCode type is none (-1), there is no user entered code/digits for this call.
All userEnteredCode parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements. The specific field in the Route Request message (Version 2) is private data ATTUserEnteredCode . da ta .
Example - GetlVRDigits
[variable declarations] NO_IVRDIGITS = -1; COLLECTED=0; ENTEREE>=1
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( SI )
# check to see if the caller entered the expected
DTMF digits if (GetIVRType( hTelHandle ) == NO_IVRDIGITS ) then Route to operator else if (GetlVRIndicator ( hTelHandle ) == COLLECTED) then IVRDigits = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle )
Process the call er entered IVR digi ts as collected
endif endif Function GetlVRIndi ca tor
The GetlVRIndicator function returns the user collected digits indicator . This indicator defines whether the data was coll ected or entered.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetlVRIndi ca t or ( h TelHandl e )
Part Description des tVariabl e Variable that receives the integer representing the indicator for the user-entered digits. 0 Collect
1 Entered h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the user collected code indicator. For an invalid telephony handle, the error -4001 (TELERR_INVALID_TEL_HANDLE) is returned.
Remarks
All userEnteredCode parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements. The specific field in the Route Request message (Version 2) is private data ATTUserEnteredCode . indica tor .
Example - GetlVRIndicator
[variable declara ti ons]
NO IVRDIGITS = -1; COLLECTED=0; ENTERED=1 # obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi! $1 )
# check to see if the caller entered the expected
DTMF digits if (GetlVRType (hTelHandle) == NO_IVRDIGITS) then
Route to operator else if (GetlVRIndicator (hTelHandle) === COLLECTED) then
IVRDigits = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) Process the call er en t ered IVR digi ts as coll ected
endif endif
Function GetlVRType
The GetlVRType function returns the user collected digits type. This type defines the method used to define the user collected digits, otherwise known as IVR Digits.
Syntax des tVariabl e = GetlVRType (h TelHandl e) Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the integer representing user collected digit type
-1 None (no coce/digits were entered by the user) 0 Any
1 Login Digits
2 Call Prompter
3 Database Provided
4 Tone Detector h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained f rom
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) f unct Lon call . Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the user collected code type. For an invalid telephony handle, the error -4001 (TELERR_INVALID_TEL_HANDLE) is returned.
Remarks
If the user collected code type is None (-1), then there is no information in the userEnteredCode for this call .
All userEnteredCode parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements. The specific field in the Route Request message (Version 2) is private data ATTUserEnteredCode . type .
Example - GetlVRType
[variabl e declara ti ons] NO_IVRDIGITS = -1
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
# check to see if the caller entered the expected
DTMF digits if (GetlVRType (hTelHandle) == NO IVRDIGITS) then Route to operator else
IVRDigits = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) Process the caller entered IVR digi ts endif Function GetLookAheadHours
The GetLookAheadHours function returns the lookahead interflow Hour. The lookahead interflow i s a G3 switch feature that routes some of the incoming calls from one switch to another conditionally (that is to say the destination switch can either accept or decline the call.) The lookahead hour is the hour part of the current time when the call was interflowed from the first switch. The lookahead interflow information is filled in by the switch that interflows the call.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetLookAheadHours (h TelHa ndl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer representing the Interflow Hour. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAt oi ($) functicn call.
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the lookahead interflow hour in military form. The lookahead interflow hour will be present if the lookahead interflow type is a valid one. For an invalid telephony handle, the error -4001 (TELERR_INVALID_TEL_HANPLE) is returned.
Remarks
The lookahead interflow hour is one of six lookahead interflow information components . The remaining five are lookahead type, lookahead source VDN, lookahead priority, lookahead minutes, and seconds. The lookahead interflow type can be used to determine whether any of the interflow information exists for a given call.
All lookahead interflow parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements.
Example - GetLookAheadHours [variable declara tions]
NO_IFLOW = -1
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) IkahdType = GetLookAheadType ( hTelHandle ) lkahdHours =GetLookAheadHours ( hTelHandle ) lkahdM utes = GetLookAheadMinutes ( hTelHandle ) lkahdSeconds = GetLookAheadSeconds ( hTelHandle ) # If lookahead type is not no interflow, output the time of the switch interflow if (IkahdType <> N0_IFL0W) then println "Call interflowed at: " ÷lkahdHours + ":" + lkahdMmutes + ":" lkahdSeconds endif
Function GetLookAheadMinutes
The GetLookAheadMinutes function returns the lookahead interflow Minute. The lookahead interflow is a G3 switch feature that routes some of the incoming calls from one switch to another conditionally (that is to say the destination switch can either accept or decline the call.) The lookahead minute is the minute part of the current time when the call was interflowed from the first switch. The lookahead interflow information is filled in by the switch that interflows the call. Syntax destVariabl e = GetLookAheadMinutes (h Tei Handl e)
Part Pescription destVariable Variable that receives the integer representing the Interflow Minute. h TelHandle Telephony handle obtained from I CRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the lookahead interflow minute. The lookahead interflow hour will be present if the lookahead interflow type is a valid one. For an invalid telephony handle, :he error -4001
(TELERR INVALIP TEL HANPLE) is returned.
Remarks
The lookahead interflow minute is one of six lookahead interflow information components. The remaining five are lookahead type, lookahead priority, lookahead source VDN, lookahead hours, and seconds. The lookahead interflow type can be used to determine whether any of the interflow information exists for a given call. All lookahead interflow parameters contained in the
Route Request message are ATT private data elements.
Example - GetLookAheadMinutes [variabl e declara tions]
NO IFLOW = -1
# obtain telephony handle by converting call IP to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) IkahdType = GetLookAheadType ( hTelHandle ) lkahdHours = GetLookAheadHours ( hTelHandle ) lkahdMmutes = GetLookAheadMinutes ( hTelHandle ) lkahdSeconds = GetLookAheadSeconds ( hTelHandle )
# If lookahead type is not no interflow, output the time of the switch interflow if (IkahdType <> NO_IFLOW) then println "Call interflowed at : " +lkahdHours + ":" + lkahdMmutes + ":" + lkahdSeconds endif
Function Ge tLookAheadPriori ty
The GetLookAheadPriority function returns the Interflow Priority. The lookahead interflow is a G3 switch feature that routes some of the incoming calls from one switch to another conditionally (i.e., the destination switch can either accept or decline the call.) The priority is that assigned to the call while in queue on the first switch if interflowed while in queue. The information is filled in by the switch that interflows the call.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetLookAheadPri ori ty (h TelHandl e) Part Pescription destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer representing the Interflow priority which can be one of the following: 0 Call was not in queue
1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
4 Top hTelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call. Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the lookahead interflow priority. The lookahead interflow priority is valid if the interflow type is one of the valid types. For an invalid telephony handle, the error -4001
(TELERR_INVALID_TEL_HANDLE) is returned.
Remarks
The lookahead interflow priority is one of six lookahead interflow information components. The remaining five are lookahead type, lookahead source VDN, lookahead hours, minutes, and seconds. The lookahead interflow type accessed via the GetLookaheadType can be used to determine whether the lookahead priority is included -n the message. All lookahead interflow parameters contained m the Route Request message are ATT private data elements.
Example - GetLookAheadPriority
[variable declara tions]
NOT_QUEUED = 0; LOW=l; MEDIUM=2; HIGH=ϊ; TOP=4; NO_IFLOW = -1
HIGH_VDN = 3300 hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) IkahdType = GetLookAheadType ( hTelHandle )
# if lookahead type is not No Interflow, check for top priority caller if (IkahdType <> NO_IFLOW) then # if top priority caller, send to VDN that will queue top priority queue on this switch if (GetLookAheadPriority ( hTelHandle) == TOP) then
SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 1) ; SetRouteSelected (hTelHandle,
HIGH_VDN) RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) endif endif
Function GetLookAheadSeconds The GetLookAheadSeconds function returns the lookahead interflow Second. The lookahead interflow is a G3 switch feature that routes some of the incoming calls from one switch to another conditionally (that is to say the destination switch can either accept or decline the call.) The lookahead second is the second part of the current time when the call was interflowed from the first switch. The lookahead interflow information is filled m by the switch that interflows the call .
Syntax destVariabl e = GetLookAheadSeconds (h TelHandl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer representing the Interflow Minute. hTelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value This function returns an integer value that represents the lookahead interflow second. The lookahead interflow hour will be present if the lookahead interflow type is a valid one. For an invalid telephony handle, the error -4001 (TELERR INVALID TEL HANDLE) is returned.
Remarks
The lookahead interflow second is one of six lookahead interflow information components. The remaining five are lookahead type, lookahead priority, lookahead source VDN, lookahead hours, and minutes. The lookahead interflow type can be used to determine whether any of the interflow information exists for a given call.
All lookahead interflow parameters contained in the Route Request message are ATT private data elements.
Example - GetLookAheadSeconds [variabl e declara ti ons] NO_IFLOW = -1 .
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
IkahdType = GetLookAheadType ( hTelHandle ) lkahdHours ^GetLookAheadHours ( hTelHandle ) lkahdMmutes = GetLookAheadMinutes ( hTelHandle ) lkahdSeconds = GetLookAheadSeconds ( hTelHandle )
# If lookahead type is not no interflow, output the time of the switch interflow if (IkahdType <> N0_IFL0W) then println "Call interflowed at : " t-lkahdHours + ":" + lkahdMmutes + ":"+ lkahdSeconds endif
Function GetLookAheadSrcVDN
The GetLookAheadSrcVDN function returns the lookahead interflow source VDN. The lookahead interflow is a G3 switch feature that routes some of the incoming calls from one switch to another conditionally (that is to say the destination switch can either accept or dec Line the call.) The lookahead source VDN is included if vector processing determined interflow, and is in the form of the VDN name (not its extension) on the interflow originating switch. The lookahead interflow information is filled m by the switch that interflows the call.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetLookAheadSrcVDN (h TelHandl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the string representing an Interflow determining VDN on the originating switch. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
This function returns a string value that represents the lookahead interflow source VDN name, if one exists. The lookahead interflow source VDN will be present if the lookahead interflow type is Vectoring Interfl ow For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns the string "NULL_POINTER" .
Remarks The lookahead interflow source VDN is one of six lookahead interflow information components. The remaining five are lookahead type, lookahead priority, lookahead hours, minutes, and seconds. The lookahead interflow type can be used to determine whether any of the interflow information exists for a given call.
All lookahead interflow parameters contained m the Route Request message are ATT private data elements. Example - GetLookAheadSrcVDN [variabl e decl ara ti ons ]
VECTOR_IFLOW = 2
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) IkahdType = GetLookAheadType ( hTelHandle)
# If lookahead type is VECTOR_IFLOW, than get source
VDN name if (IkahdType <> NO_IFLO then IkahdSrcVDN ^GetLookAheadSrcVDN (hTelHandle) println "Call interflowed from VDN:" + IkahdSrcVDN endif
Function GetLookAheadType The GetLookAheadType function returns the Interflow
Type. The lookahead interflow is a G3 switch feature that routes some of the incoming calls from one switch to another conditionally (that is to say the destination switch can either accept or decline the call.) The lookahead interflow information is filled in by the switch that interflows the call .
Syntax destVariable = GetLookAheadType (h TelHandl e) Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the integer representing the Interflow type which can be one of the following: -1 No Interflow (no interflow information present)
0 All Interflow
1 Threshold Interflow
2 Vectoring Interflow h TelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call .
Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the lookahead interflow type . The lookahead interf low type will always have one of the above speci f ied values . For an invalid telephony handle , the error - 4001 (TELERR_INVALID_TEL_HANDLE ) i s returned .
Remarks
The lookahead interflow type is one of six lookahead interflow information components. The remaining five are lookahead priority, lookahead source VDN, lookahead hours, minutes, and seconds. The lookahead interflow type can be used to determine whether any of the interflow information exists for a given call.
All lookahead interflow parameters contained the Route Request message are ATT private data elements.
Example - GotLookAheadType
[variable declara ti ons] NO_IFLOW = -1; ALL_IFLOW=0; THOLD_IFLOW=l;
VECTOR_IFLOW=2
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
IkahdType = GetLookAheadType ( hTelHandle)
# If lookahead type is VECTOR_ IFLOW (2) we can get the source VDN name if (IkahdType == VECTOR IFLOW) then println "The lookahead source VDN name is' GetLookAheadSrcVD ( hTelHandle) endif
Function GetMinute
The GetMinute function returns an integer representing the current minute of the current hour, based upon the most recent call to GetCurrentTime within the script.
Syntax des tVariabl e = GetMinu te (HTimeHandl e) Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving an integer that is the current minute (0-59.) h TimeHandl e Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandle call .
Return Value If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current minute. For the case of an invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
Remarks It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling
CreateTimeHandle and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrent Time before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurrent Time in the script.
Example - GetMinute
[variable declarati ons]
RETOK = 0 INVALID HΝDL = 0 # Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTιmeHandle ( )
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID_HNDL) then
# obtain the time data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is: " + GetAscTime ( hTimeHandle) hr - GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; mm =
GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond (hTimeHandle) println "From components hh: mm:ss:" + hr + ":"
+ mm +" : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is: " + o + "/"
+ day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek ( hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) : " + GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle (hTimeHandle) endif
Function GetMonth
The GetMonth function returns an integer representing the current month of the year (1-12) based upon the most recent call to GetCurrentTime with the script.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetMonth (h TimeHandl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving an integer that is the current month of the year(l
-12.) h TimeHandl e Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandle call .
Return Value
If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current month of the year. For the case of an invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
Remarks
It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling Crea teTimeHandl e and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurren t Time before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurrent Time in the script.
Example - GetMonth
[variable declarations] RETOK = 0
INVALI D_HNDL = 0
# Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTimeHandle ( )
# make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID _ HNDL) then
# obtain the time data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is: " + GetAscTime ( hTimeHandle) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; min = GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond (hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss: " + hr + " : " + min + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is: " + mo
+ "/" + day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek
(hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) : '
+ GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle) endif
Function GetNumericFi eldVal ue
The GetNumericFi eldVal ue function returns the value for a specified numeric (integer) type field from the "current" database record. A current database record must be identified using the RunQuery operation before accessing fields withm the record.
Syntax destVariabl e GetNumeri cFi el dVal ue (hDBHandle, fieldName)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving the integer value returned from the record hDBHandle Variable that receives the allocated database handle fieldName Parameter of string type containing record field name to retrieve
Return Value
Returns the field's numeric value if successful, otherwise the function returns the integer -99999. Remarks
The GetNumeri cFi el dVal ue function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the Crea teDBHandl e function, and a "current" record being defined through the RunQuery function call.
Example - GetNumericFieldValue [variabl e declara ti ons] INVALID _ HΝDL = 0; RETOK=0; EΝD_OF_FILΞ = -9; GOLD
= 1 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1) # If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if ( hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL then perform defa ul t route processing else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=",
GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) ) # while the field is equal to the key, set acctFound field do
SetStringFieldValue ( hDBHandle,
"AcctNotes", "ACCT LOCATED") UpdateRecord ( hDBHandle ) nRet = MoveNextRecord( hDBHandle) if (nRet == RETOK ) then
If (GetNumericFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "CustClass") == GOLD) then acctNo = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "AccountNo") endif endif while (nRet <> END_OF_FILE And acctNo == GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle)) endif route call to defaul t call processing VDN DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle ) Function GetNumlVRSets
The GetNumlVRSets function returns the number of IVR
"sets" available to this IIR script. This function, as well as the Set Curr en tlVRSets function, is related to the RouteMore function explained in the Remarks section of this description.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetNumlVRSets (h TelHandl e) Part Description destVar ajble Variable that receives the integer representing the number of IVR digit "sets". hTelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value This function returns an integer value that represents the number of IVR digit "sets". For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns the value -4001.
Remarks There are three functions related to the IVR set concept, RouteMore, GetNumlVRSets , and SetCurrentlVRSets . The RouteMore function allows an IIR script to perform multiple IVR digit queries with the caller without leaving the control scope of the one IIR script. The GetNumlVRSets allows the script to obtain the number of IVR digit sets that are potentially available, based upon the first script invocation as well as all RouteMore calls for more collected digits. The .RouteMore call actually sends control back to a call prompting VDN to obtain more digits, where control is returned to the IIR script through the call vectoring adjunct command. Upon return from the RouteMore function, the most recent set of IVR collected digits is automatically available through the GetlVR functions (GetlVRType , GetlVRIndica tor, and GetlVRDigi ts . )
The script can, however, also access any previous "set" of IVR data (withm the scope of this one TIR script) by forcing the previous "set" of IVR data to "ocus with the SetCurrentlVRSets function.
Example - GetNumlVRSets
[variabl e declara ti ons] NO _ IVRDATA = -1; GET_PIN_VDN="3200"; FIRST_SET=0;
BOTH_SETS=2 # obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) # check to see if account number was entered by caller, if so collect PIN number if (GetlVRType (hTelHandle) <> NO_IVRDATA) then SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) ;
SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, GET_PIN_VDN) RouteMore ( hTelHandle ) if (GetNumlVRSets ( hTelHandle) == B0TH_SETS) then pinNu = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) SetCurrentlVRSets ( hTelHandle, FIRST_SET) acctNum = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle )
Perform database match on acctNum/pinNum and process call endif endif Function GetSecond
The GetSecond function returns an integer representing the current second of the current mmute based upon the most recent call to GetCurrentTime withm the script.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetSecond (hTimeHandl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving an integer that is the current second (0-59.) h TimeHandl e Variable that was assigned a time handle via Cre teri.T.e.fan le call.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current second. For the case of an invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
Remarks
It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling
Crea teTimeHandle and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrent Time before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurren t Time in the script.
Example - GetSecond
[variabl e declara ti ons]
RETOK = 0 INVALID HΝDL = 0
# Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTιmeHandle ( ) # make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID _ HNDL) then
# obtain the time data information
GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is:" + GetAscTime (hTimeHandle) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle); mm =
GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond (hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss hr +
+ mm + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle yr=GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is: + mo + "/"
+ day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek
(hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off
GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle) endif
Function GetStrmgFieldVal ue
The GetStrmgFieldValue function returns the value for a specified string type field from the "current" database record. A current database record must be identified using the RunQuery operation before accessing fields withm the record.
Syntax destVaπ aj l e GetStrmgFi el dVal ue (hDBHandle , fi eldName)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving the string field result from he operation hDBHandl e Variable that receives the allocated database handle fieldName Parameter of string type containing record field name to retrieve
Return Value Returns the field's string value if successful, otherwise the function returns the string "< INVALID STRIΝG>".
Remarks The GetStrmgFi eldVal ue function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the Crea teDBHandl e function, and a "current" record being defined through the RunQuery function call.
Example - GetStrmgFieldValue [vari abl e declara ti ons ]
I VALID_ HNDL = 0; RETOK=0; END_OF_FILE = -9 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if ( hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL) then perform defaul t route processing else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=",
GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) ) # while the field is equal to the key, set acctFound field do
SetStringFieldValue ( hDBHandle,
"AcctNotes", "ACCT LOCATED") UpdateRecord ( hDBHandle) nRet = MoveNextRecord ( hDBHandle) if (nRet == RETOK) then acctNo = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "AccountNo"! endif while (nRet <> END_OF_FILE And acctNo = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) ) endif route call to defaul t cal l processing JDN DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle )
Function GetTrunk
The GetTrunk function returns the Trurk Group Number of the inbound originating trunk. This information is available only for calls that are originated over non-PRI lines. The GetCallingDevice function is used to retrieve information for calls originated over PRI lines or on-PBX extensions. This parameter is obtained :rom the Route Request Service message (Version 2) , trunk field.
Syntax destVariabl e = GetTrunk (hTelHandle)
Part Description destVanable Variable that receives the string returned from this function. h TelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
I CRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value his function returns a string expression that represents the originating trunk group number. If the return value is a zero length string, no tr ink information was received for this call. For an invalid telephony handle, the string "NULL_P0INTER" is returned. Remarks
The trunk field in the Route Request Service message is an optional component of this message, therefore it may not exist for each call. The trunk field is mutually exclusive with the callmgDevice field accessed through the GetCallingDevi ce function. This means one or the other of callmgDevi ce or trunk are available m the message, but never both.
Example - GetTrunk
[vanabl e declara tions]
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
ANI = GetCallingDevice (hTelHandle)
# checking for a zero length string determines whether the field is m the message if (ANI <> "") then println "The calling device (ANI) is "+ ANI else
# the trunk data will be available when the calling device isn't trunkID = GetTrunk ( hTelHandle) println "The inbound trunk group ID = " + trunkID endif
Function GetVDN
The GetVDN function returns the vector directory number (VDN) of the VDN that first handled the call on the switch. This parameter is obtained from the Route Request Service message (Version 2) , currentRoute field. Syntax destVariable = GetVDN (h TelHandl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the string returned from this function. h TelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call. Return Value
If the telephony handle is valid, the function returns the currentRoute member of the
RouteRequestExt structure as a string, otherwise the string "NULL_P0INTER" is returned.
Remarks
The currentRoute field in the Route Request Service message is a mandatory component of this message, meaning it will always be available upon receipt of a route request. This field is often used in the same manner as DNIS on an off-PBX inbound call.
Example - GetVDN
[variable declara ti ons!
# obtain telephony handle by converting! call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) # if the VDN is equal to accounting DNIS, route to acct hunt group extension if (GetVDN ( hTelHandle ) == "2222" ) then SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, "3000") else # if VDN is marketing DNIS, route to ktg hunt group extension if (GetVDN ( hTelHandle ) == "3333" ) then SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, "3100") endif endif
# define parameters required to route call SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) RouteFinal ( hTelHandle )
Function GetYear
The GetYear function returns an integer representing the current year of the century (i.e. 1995 will return 95) based upon the most recent call to GetCurrent Time within the script .
Syntax destVariable = GetYear ( hTimeHandl e ) Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving an integer that is the current year of the century (0-99. ) hTimeHandl e Variable that was assigned a time handle via Crea teTimeHandl e call.
Return Value If successful, this function returns an integer defining the current year of the century. For the case of an invalid time handle, the function returns -5008.
Remarks It is necessary to allocate the time handle by calling
Crea teTimeHandl e and obtain the time and date information through a call to GetCurrent Time before calling this function. The information returned by this call will be based upon the last call to GetCurrent Time in the script. Example - GetYear
[vanabl e declara tions]
RETOK = 0 INVALID_HNDL = 0
# Create Time Handle hTimeHandle =CreateTimeHandle ( ) # make sure the time handle is valid before accessing the data if (hTimeHandle <> INVALID _ HNDL) then # obtain the time data information GetCurrentTime ( hTimeHandle ) println "The current time is: " + GetAscTime
(hTimeHandle) hr = GetHour ( hTimeHandle ) ; min = GetMinute (hTimeHandle) ; sec = GetSecond(hTimeHandle) println "From components hh:mm:ss " + hr + ":"
+ min + " : " + sec mo=GetMonth (hTimeHandle) ; day=GetDayOfMonth (hTimeHandle) yr-GetYear (hTimeHandle) println "From components, date is: " + mo + "/"
+ day + "/" + yr println "Day of week:" +GetDayOfWeek (hTimeHandle) println "Daylight Savings Time (On/Off) : " +
GetDst (hTimeHandle) println "Day of year" +
GetDayOfYear (hTimeHandle) DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle) endif
Function ICRLAtoi
The ICRLAtoi function returns an integer version of the string passed in as the paramter.
Syntax destVariable = ICRLAtoi (string) Part Description destVariable Variable receiving the integer representation of the string. string String parameter to convert to numeric format. The string passed here must contain numeric characters only (0-9) or an error will be returned.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns a numeric representation of the string parameter.
Remarks
NONE
Example - ICRLAtoi
[variable declarations]
# search and extract string components from the comma delimited file hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
Process the call using the numeric telephony handle converted above.
Function ICRLLeft The ICRLLeft function returns the leftmost (first in a sequence) number of characters specified from the string parameter and returns this string.
Syntax destVariabl e = ICRLLeft ( stringParam, numChars) Part Description destVariable Variable receiving the sub-string extracted from leftmost numChars . strmgParam String parameter to extract leftmost numChars from. numChars Integer parameter defining how many characters to extract.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns a string that is the leftmost numChars specified from the strmgParam . A null string (0 length string) is returned if the function is unable to perform the extraction due to inconsistent or invalid parameters.
Remarks
NONE
Example - ICRLLeft
[variable decl ara tions] # search and extract string components from the comma delimited file tstStr = "'This', 'is', 'the', 'data', 'from',
the', 'file', end'" Count = 0 do
# locate the starting ' single quote of a word, and assign tstStr to start there tstSTr = ICRLStrStr (tstStr, "")
# Extract the rightmost characters, less the starting ' single quote tstStr = ICRLRight (tstStr, ICRLStr en (tstStr) -1)
# Now extract the word up to the next single quote mark subStr = IRLLeft (tstStr, ICRLStrindex (tstStr,
"",0) ) # Reassign the test string to the rightmost characters, minus the substring tstStr = ICRLRight (tstStr, ICRLStrLen (tstStr) (ICRLStrLen (subStr)+l)) print subStr+"" Count = Count +1 loop until (subStr == "end" Or Count 7 = 10]
Function ICRLMid
The ICRLMid function returns a sub-string from a string defined by a starting character index and a length cf the sub-string.
Syntax destVariable ICRLMid ( strmgParam, startchar, numChars)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving the sub-string extracted from right most numChars . strmgParam String parameter to extract right most numChars from. startchar Index of starting character within strmgParam (0 based index.) numChars Integer parameter defining how many characters to extract.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns a string that is the middle numChars specified starting at index startchar from the strmgParam. A null string (0 length string) is returned if the function is unable to perform the extraction due to inconsistent or invalid parameters. Remarks
The startchar parameter is a zero based index. The first character m a string is the Oth character, with the second character being the 1st, and so on. This is important to keep in mind when performing string manipulations, to assure the intended sub-strmg is obtained in the ICRLMid function call.
Example - ICRLMid [vari abl e declarations]
# search and extract string components from the comma delimited file tstStr = "This is the test string." subStr = ICRLMid (tstStr, 5, 6) println "Sub String:" + subStr
<the resul tant output woul d be "'Sub String: is the"> The fifth character in the s tring i s a bl ank , but 0 based the fifth chara c ter i s the "l " m i s .
Function ICRLRi gh t
The ICRLRight function returns the right most (last in a sequence) number of characters specified from the string parameter and returns this string.
Syntax des tVariabl e =ICRLLeft (s trmgParam , numChars) Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving the sub-strmg extracted from right most numChars . strmgParam String parameter to extract right most numChars from. numChars Integer parameter defining how many characters to extract.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns a string that is the right most numChars specified from the strmgParam . A null string (0 length string) is returned if the function is unable to perform the extraction due to inconsistent or invalid parameters.
Remarks
NONE
Example - ICRLRight
[variable declarations]
# search and extract string components from the comma delimited file tstStr = "'This', 'is*, 'the', 'data', 'from',
Figure imgf000195_0001
Count do do # locate the starting ' single quote of a word, and assign tstStr to start there tstStr = ICRLStrStr( tstStr""' )
# Extract the rightmost characters, less the starting ' single quote tstStr = ICRLRight ( tstStr, ICRLStrLen ( tstStr )-l)
# Now extract the word up to the next single quote mark subStr = ICRLLeft ( tstStr, ICRLStrlndex ( tstStr, ""', 0) )
# Reassign the test string to the rightmost characters, minus the substring tstStr = ICRLRight ( tstStr, ICRLStrLen ( tstStr) - (ICRLStrLen (subStr) +1) ) print subStr+" " Count = Count + 1 loop until (subStr == "end" Or Count >=: 10]
Function ICRLStrCopy
The ICRLStrCopy function returns a persistent copy of the string passed in.
Syntax destVariaj le = I CRLStrCopy (stringParam)
Part Description destVanable Variable receiving the copy of the stringParam. stringParam String parameter tc copy.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns a string that is a copy of the stringParam. A null string (0 length string) is returned if the function is unable to perform the extraction due to inconsistent or invalid parameters.
Remarks NONE
Example - ICRLStrCopy
[variable declarati ons] # search and extract string components from the comma delimited file tstStr ="This is the test string." strCopy = ICRLStrCopy(tstStr) Function ICRLStrlndex
The ICRLStrlndex function searches a string for a specified sub-string starting at a given index in the string, and if found, returns the index of the first character in the sequence.
Syntax destVariabl e = ICRLStrlndex (stringParam, fi ndstr, startldx) Part Description destVariable Variable receiving the integer index of the sub-string or failure code. stringParam String variable being searched for occurrence of findstr. findstr String variable to locate in the stringParam . startldx Index in stringParam (0 based) to start searching for findstr.
Return Value
If successful, this functon returns an index to the findstr within the stringParam . If the findstr i s not located in the stringParam, starting at the designated startldx, then the function returns a -1. The function also returns a -1 in the case where the string parameters and start index have inconsistent or illegal data.
Remarks
The index returned from this function as well as the startldx parameter are both 0 based. That is to say the first character index of any string is 0, rather than 1. If searching for the string "cat" in the string "rammg cats and dogs", and giving a s tartldx of 0 (start at the beginning of the string) , the resulting mαex would be 8, even though the word cat begins with the ninth (9th) character. Once again, the indexes are 0 based, and are therefore counting the first character of a string as the Oth character.
This index can be used to select a sub-strmg from a super-string using functions such as ICRLMid.
Example - ICRLStrlndex
[variable declarations]
# search and extract string components from the comma delimited file tstStr tstStr = "'This', 'is', 'the', 'data*, 'from',
the', 'file', 'end'"
Count = 0 do do # locate the starting ' single quote of a word, and assign tstStr to start there tstStr = ICRLStrStr ( tstStr, '") # Extract the rightmost characters, less the starting ' single quote tstStr = ICRLRight (tstStr, ICRLStrLen ( tstStr )-l)
# Now extract the word up to the next single quote mark subStr = ICRLLeft ( tstStr, ICRLStrlndex ( tstStr, ""', 0) )
# Reassign the test string to the rightmost characters, minus the substr..ng tstStr = ICRLRight ( tstStr, ICRLStrLen ( tstStr)
- (ICRLStrLen ( subStr )+l) ) print subStr+" " Count = Count + I loop until (subStr == "end" Or Count >== 10) Function ICRLStrLen
The ICRLStrLen function returns an integer representing the length of the string passed in as a parameter to the function.
Syntax destVariabl e = ICRLStrLen (stri ngParam)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving an integer that is the length of the string parameter. stringParam String variable for which the length is requested.
Return Value
If successful, this function returns an integer >= 0 that is the string length. If the stringParam is invalid, this function returns -1.
Remarks
This function returns the length of the string, not counting the null terminator. For instance, the string "this" would have a string length of 4.
Example - ICRLStrLen
[variable declara ti ons] # the following string length operation would return a string length of (11) strLen = ICRLStrLen ( "This String") Function ICRLStrStr
The ICRLStrStr function searches a string for a specified sub-str g, and if found, returns a pointer into the search string where the sub-strmg was found.
Syntax destVariabl e = ICRLStrStr (StringParam, fmdStr)
Part Description destVariable Variable receiving sub-strmg of stringParam if fmdStr is located. stringParam String variable being searched for occurrence of fmdStr. fmdStr String variable to locate in the stringParam .
Return Value If successful, this function returns a string that is the sub-strmg starting with the fmdStr parameter. If the fmdStr is not located in the stringParam then the function returns a 0 length string.
Remarks
NONE
Example - ICRLStrStr
[variabl e declara ti ons]
# Find the substring starting with the word
"Petrified" resultStr = ICRLStrStr ( "Walk through the Petrified
Forest", "Petrified") println "Substring is: " + resultStr
<thιs would resul t m the string "Substring i s : Petrified Forest " being dι splayed> Function InsertRecord
The InsertRecord function adds a newly defined record to the database. This record's fields are defined using the SetStringFi eldVal ue and SetNumeri cFi eldVal ue functions, before insertion. The insertion of a record is dependent upon those fields defined as unique keys (through the database administrator) having unique values assigned to them before insertion.
Syntax destVariable - InsertRecord (hDBHandl e)
Part Description destVariable Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call hDBHandl e Variable that receives the allocated database handle
Return Value
Returns 0 if successful, for an invalid database handle the function returns -5008. This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Some of the more common errors returned by Btrieve are covered in the IIR trouble shooting guide.
Remarks
The InsertRecord function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the CreateDBHandl e function. The fields defined as "primary" keys through the IIR database administrator, need to have been set to unique values using the SetStringFi el dVal ue, as well as all other fields being defined before the insertion occurs.
Example - InsertRecord
[variable declara ti ons]
INVALID_ HNDL = 0; RETOK=0 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if (hDBHandle == INVALID _ HΝDL) then perform defaul t route processing else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=",
GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle)) # If the Query returned return OK, then modify key fields and save as new record if ( nRet == RETOK ) then
SetStringFieldValue (hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "333333333") SetShingFieldValue (hDBHandle, "LastName", "Smith") SetStringFieldValue (hDBHandle,
"FirstNamew, "James") If (InsertRecord ( hDBHandle ) <> RETOK ) then process error on inserting new record endif endif endif
DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle
Function MoveNextRecord
The MoveNextRecord function reassigns the hDBHandl e to the next record in the database, based upon the field index most recently referenced in a RunQuery command. For example, if a record is located using the RunQuery function using "AccountNo " as the comparison field name, the MoveNextRecord moves to the next record in the AccountNo field index file, or returns an error for end of file.
Syntax destVariable = MoveNextRecord (hDBHandl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call. hDBHandle Variable that receives the allocated database handle
Return Value Returns 0 if successful, for an invalid database handle the function returns -5008. This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Some of the more common errors returned by Btrieve are covered in the IIR trouble shooting guide. When there is no next record (end of file), this function will return Btrieve error - 9.
Remarks
The MoveNextRecord function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the Crea teDBHandl e function, and a "current" record being defined through the RunQuery function call.
Example - MoveNextRecord [variabl e declara ti ons]
INVALID_HNDL = 0; RETOK=0; END_OF_FILE = -9 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1) # If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if ( hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL) then perform defaul t mute processing else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=",
GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) ) # while the field is equal to the key, set acctFound field do
SetStringFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "AcctNotes", "ACCT LOCATED") UpdateRecord) hDBHandle ) nRet = MoveNextRecord (hDBHandle) if (nRet == RETOK ) then acctNo = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "AccountNo") endif while (nRet <> END_OF_FILE .And acctNo == GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) ) endif route caJJ to defaul t call processing VDN DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle)
Function MovePrevi ousRecord
The MovePreviousRecord function reassigns the hDBHandle to the preceding record m the database, based upon the field index most recently referenced m a RunQuery command. For instance, if a record has been located using the RunQuery function using "AccountNo " as the comparison field name, the MovePrevi ousRecord will move to the preceding record in the AccountNo field index file, or return an error for end of file.
Syntax destVariable = MovePrevi ousRecord (hDBHandl e) Part Description destVariable Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call . hDBHandl e Variable that receives the allocated database handle
Return Value
Returns 0 if successful, for an invalid database handle the function returns -5008. This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Some of the more common errors returned by Btrieve are covered in the IIR trouble shooting guide. When there is no preceding record (beg of file) , this function will return Btrieve error - 9.
Remarks The MovePrevi ousrecord function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the Crea teDBHandle function, and a "current" record being defined through the RunQuery function call.
Example - MovePreviousRecord [variable declarations]
INVALID HNDL = 0; RETOK=0; BEG_OF_FILE = -9 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if ( hDBHandle == INVALID _ HNDL then perform defaul t route processing else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "<", GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) ) # while the field is less than the entered digits do
SetStringFieldValue ( hDBHandle,
"AcctNotes", "ACCT LOCATED") UpdateRecord ( hDBHandle) nRet = MoveProvioueRecord ( hDBHandle) while (nRet <> BEG_OF_FILE) endif route call to defa ul t call processing VDN DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle)
Function QueryAgen tSta te The QueryAgentState function obtains information on the state of an agent on the DEFINITY G3 switch. The agents device ID (extension for splits/login ID for skills based routing) and agent split/skill are used to obtain the information. After calling this function, various Get... functions related to the agent status can be called (GetAgentAvailable, GetAgentSta te, GetAgentWorkMode , and GetAgent TalkSta te . )
Syntax destVariable = QueryAgen tSta te (h TelHandl e, agDevice, agSpli t)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the success/failure notification for this call. hTelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1) function call. agDevice Mandatory parameter defining a valid agent extension. agSpli t Mandatory parameter defining a valid ACD split/skill. Return Value
This function returns an integer value that represents the success/failure of the call. If the call succeeds, a 0 is returned, for an invalid telephony handle, -4001 is returned. If there are inconsistencies between parameters or an invalid parameter is passed, -4002 is returned. For failures at the TSERVER, see the trouble shooting section for possible error Return Values Remarks
The agDevice parameter can be the agent login-ID when using skills based routing on the switch. Likewise, the agSpli t can be one of the skill extensions assigned to the agent (i.e. the hunt group extensions of the related skills.)
Example - QueryAgentState
[variable declarati ons] SKILL_ HUNT = "2800" hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# "3600" represents a specific agents login-ID nRet = QueryAgentState( hTelHandle, "3600", SKILL_HUNT) if (GetAgentAvailable ( hTelHandle ) ) then send caller to this specific agent else send caller to general queue for handling endif
Function RouteFinal
The RouteFinal function is one of three route specification functions (RouteMore, RouteFinal , and Route Unknown . ) An IIR script uses this function to route a call for the last time in the context of the current script execution. Any use of the telephony handle alter execution of this function will return an error.
Syntax destVariabl e = RouteFinal (hTelHandle)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer representing success/failure of call. Any non-zero failure code received can induce any of the error codes defined for the telephony functio s in the trouble-shooting guide. h TelHandle Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value If successful the function returns 0, for an invalid telephony handle -4001. All other non-zero error codes can be referenced to the telephony function erroi codes in the trouble-shooting guide.
Remarks
Performing the RouteFinal operation implies that the FINAL destination for the call has been determined for the execution of this script. The itouteFmal command inherently releases the telephony handle obtained from the call to ICRLAtoi ($1) . Any reference to the telephony handle after the RouteFinal call in the script will result m an invalid telephony handle error being returned.
The RouteFinal function call must be preceded by the setting of the mandatory route fields
Figure imgf000208_0001
tyCallmg and routeSelected through the functions SetPri ori tyCall and SetRouteSel ected respectively. If these fields are not defined before the RouteFinal is attempted, the G3 Telephony Services driver will reject the RouteSelect message and will result in the call not being routed.
When this occurs, the VDN on the switch which has transferred control to the IIR Script will timeout waiting for a response from the adjunct request, and will subsequently execute the next command in the vector processing for that call.
Example - RouteFinal
[variable declara tions] DFLT_ RTE ="3100" hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1)
# if the VDN is equal to accounting DNIS, route to acct hunt group extension if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "2222") then DFLT_RTE = "3300" endif
SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, DFLT_RTE) SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) RouteFinal ( hTelHandle)
Function RouteMore
The RouteMore function is one of three route specification functions (RouteMore, RouteFinal , and RouteUnknown . ) This function requests that call control be routed back to an intermediate VDN for collection of more user entered digits, while maintaining control of the call the IIR script. Syntax destVariabl e = RouteMore (h TelHandl e)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer representing success/ failure of call. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call.
Return Value
If successful the function returns 0, for an invalid telephony handle -4001, and for a timeout waiting for the RouteRequest message, the function returns error -208.
Remarks
There are three functions related to the IVR set concept, RouteMore, GetNumlVRSets , and SetCurrentlVRSets . The RouteMore function allows an IIR script to perform multiple IVR digit queries with the caller without leaving the control scope of the one IIR script.
The GetNumlVRSets allows the script to obtain the number of IVR digit sets that are potentially available, based upon the first script invocation as well as all RouteMore calls for more collected digits. The ΛouteΛore call actually sends control back to a call prompting VDN to obtain more digits, where control is returned to the IIR script through the call vectoring adjunct command. Upon return from the RouteMore function, the most recent set of IVR collected digits is automatically available through the GetlVR functions (GetlVRType, GetlVRIndi ca tor, and GetlVRDigi ts . ) The script can, however, also access any previous "set" of IVR data (withm the scope of this one IIR script) by forcing the previous "set" of IVR data to focus with the SetCurrentlVRSets function. When the RouteMore function is used, the script will continue executing at the command following the RouteMore call when the intermediate VDN completes its call vectoring task and issues an adjunct route request.
The RouteMore functi on call must be preceded by the setting of the mandatory route fields pri oπ tyCallmg and routeSel ected through the calls SetPri ori tyCall and SetRouteSel ected respectively.
Additionally, the SetRouteSel ected function should identify a VDN having digit collection capabilities and most importantly an adjunct route command in the body of the associated call vector on the G3 switch. This adjunct route command assures that control will be returned to the awaiting IIR script.
If control is not returned within the default time out period, the IIR script will automatically terminate based upon the "RouteMoreTimer—nn" entry m the CTI.CFG file found in the installation directory of the NetWare NLMs.
Example - RouteMore [variabl e declara ti ons]
NO_IVRDATA = -1; GET_PIN_VDN="3200"; FIRST_SET=0; BOTH_SETS=2
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
# check to see if account number was entered by caller, if so collect PIN number if (GetlVRType ( hTelHandle ) <> NO _ IVRDATA) then SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) ; SetRouteSelected
(hTelHandle, GET_PIN_VDN) RouteMore ( hTelHandle ) if (GetNumlVRSets (hTelHandle) == B0TH_SETS) then pinNu = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle )
SetCurrentlVRSets ( hTelHandle, FIRST _ SET) acctNum = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) Perform da tabase ma tch on acctNum/pinNum and process call endif endif
Function RouteUnknown
The RouteUnknown function is one of three route specification functions (Rou teMore , RouteFinal , and RouteUnknown) . An IIR script uses this function to route a call for the last time in the context of the current script when there is no known route as determined by the script. The result is execution of the command immediately following the adjunct route command in the VDN requesting route direction.
Syntax destVariaj ie = RouteUnknown (hTelHandle) Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer representing succe.ss/failure of call. Any non-zero failure code received can include any of the error codes defined for the telephony functions in the trouble-shooting guide. h TelHandle Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1) function call. Return Value
If successful the function returns 0, for an invalid telephony handle -4001. All other non-zero error codes can be referenced to the telephony function error codes m the trouble-shooting guide.
Remarks
Performing the RouteUnknown operation implies that no FINAL destination for the call has been determined for the execution of this script. The RouteUnknown command inherently releases the telephony handle obtained from the call to ICRLAtoi ($1 ) . Any reference to the telephony handle after the RouteUnknown call in the script will result in an invalid telephony handle error being returned. The RouteUnknown function, unlike the RouteFinal and
RouteMore commands, does NOT require that the priori tyCallmg and routeSel ected fields to be defined before invocation. If the route is unknown, these fields would obviously be meaningless m the message. When this occurs, the VDN on the switch which has transferred control to the IIR Script will timeout waiting for a response from the adjunct request, and will subsequently execute the next command m the vector processing for that call.
Example - RouteUnknown
[variabl e declarations] hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# if the VDN is equal to accounting or marketing DNIS, route to default hunt group extension if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "2222" Or GetVDN(hTelHandle) == "3333") then SetRouteSelected (hTelHandle, DFLT_RTE) ;
SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) RouteFinal ( hTelHandle) else
# no valid route is known for the call, leave handling of call to originating VDN RouteUnknown ( hTelHandle) endif
Function Run Query
The RunQuery function is used to query the IIR database and locate a matching record the database. Based upon the query criteria, a matching database record may or may not be found. If the RunQuery function returns successfully, the hDBHandle can be used in combination with other database functions to read, update, or delete the current record.
Syntax destVariable RunQuery (hDBHandle, fi eldName, queryOp, keyVal ue)
Part Description destVariable Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call . hDBHandle Parameter that is the database handle in the script fi eldName Parameter of string type that is the "key" field name to search for a match against the keyVal ue field. This "key" field name can be any of the field names defined through the IIR Database Administration utility. queryOp Parameter of string type that is the comparison operator for the query. Valid query criteria are -
"<" -Values of fieldName that are less than keyVal ue
"<=" -Values of fieldName that are less than or equal to keyVal ue
"=" -Values of fieldName that are equal to keyVal ue
">" -Values of fieldName that are greater than JceyValue
">=»-Values of fi eldName that are greater than or equal to keyVal ue keyVal ue Parameter of string type to be compared to fi el dName values in the DB
Return Value
If successful, this function returns 0. If all parameters are valid, but no record is found to match the search criteria, the function will return -4. For an invalid database handle, this function returns an integer value of -5008. If any of the parameters are inconsistent or are invalid, the function will return -5004. This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Some of the more common errors returned by Btrieve are covered in the IIR trouble shooting guide.
Remarks
A database handle must be allocated before invoking this function using the Crea teDBHandl e function. All functions accessing the database for specific records should not be invoked until this function has been called to successfully locate a record in the database. Example - RunQuery
[variable declara ti ons]
INVALID_HNDL = 0 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if (hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL) then perform defaul t route processi ng else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=", GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle) )
# If the Query returned return OK, then print out the customer information if ( nRet == RETOK) then
IstName = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "LastName") frstName = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle,
"FirstName") delCount = GetNumericFieldValue (hDBHandle, "DelinqCount") process caller based upon delinquent count and log if delinquent > 3 if (delCount > 3) then println "Customer"+lstNaτιe+", "+firstName+" has del =
"+delCount endif endif endif
DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle )
Function SetCurrentlVRSets
The SetCurrentlVIRSets function specifies for which "set" of IVR collected digits the GetlVR functions (GetlVRType, GetlVRIndica tor, and GetlVRDigi ts) apply. Syntax destVariabl e = SetCurrentlVRSets ( h TelHandl e, setl dx)
Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the integer representing the success or failure of the function call. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call. setldx Specifies the "set" of IVR data to access (0 based index value)
Return Value This function returns an integer value of 0 if successful; or returns the value -4001 for invalid telephony handle. If the se Jdx parameter is invalid, it returns -4002.
Remarks
Three functions relate to the IVR set concept, RouteMore, GetNumlVRSets, and SetCurrentlVRSets . The
RouteMore function allows an IIR script to perform multiple IVR digit queries with the caller without leaving the control scope of the one IIR script.
The GetNumlVRSets allows the script to obtain the number of IVR digit sets that are potentially available, based upon the first script invocation as well as all RouteMore calls for more collected digits. The RouteMore call sends control back to a call prompting VDN to obtain more digits, returning control to the IIR script through the call vectoring adjunct command. Upon return from the RouteMore function, the most recent set of IVR collected digits is available through the GetlVR functions (GetlVRType, GetlVRIndica tor, and GetlVRDigi ts . ) The script can also access any previous "set" of IVR data (within the scope of this one IIR script) by forcing the previous "set" of IVR data to focus with the SetCurrentlVRSets function.
Example - SetCurrentlVRSets
[variable declarations]
NO_IVRDATA = -1; GET_PIN_VDN="3200"; FIRST_SET=0; B0TH_SETS=2 # obtain telephony handle by converting- call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
# check to see if account number was entered by caller, if so collect PIN number if (GetlVRType ( hTelHandle ) <>NO_IVRDATA ) then
SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, ) ;
SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, GET_PIN__VDN) Handle, 0) ;
RouteMore ( hTelHandle ) if (GetNumlVRSets ( hTelHandle ) == BOTH_SETS) then pinNu = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) SetCurrentlVRSets ( hTelHandle, FIRST_SET) acctNum = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) Perform da tabase ma tch on acctNum/pinNum and process call endif endif
Function SetDestRoute
The SetDestRoute function is used to spiecify optional TAC/ARS/AAR route control information for off-PBX destinations, if the information is not included in the routeSelected. This parameter is placed in tie Route Select Service message (Version 2) , destRoute field. Syntax destVariabl e = SetDestRoute;' h TelHandle, routeinfo )
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer success/failure of the call. hTelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call. routelnfo This parameter is a string containing the des tRoute information.
Return Value
If the set of the destRoute field in the RouteSel ectRequest succeeds, this function returns 0. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns -4001. If the routelnfo parameter is invalid, this function returns -4002.
Remarks
The destRoute field of the RouteSelectReguest defines route control information for TAC/AAR/ARS. Common values for this field are "8" for AAR and "9" for ARS, however these are definable on the PBX.
Example - SetDestRoute
[variabl e declara ti ons]
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) # if the VDN is equal to accounting DNIS, route to external number, use ARS if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "2222" ) then SetDestRoute ( hTelHandle, "9") SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, "6125183000" else # if VDN is marketing DNIS, route to mktg hunt group extension if (GetVDN ( hTelHandle ) == "3333" ) then SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, "3100") endif endif
# define parameters required to route call SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0 )
RouteFinal ( hTelHandle )
Function SetDirect edAgen tCal l Spl i t
The SetDirectedAgentCallSplit defines one of the optional fields, directAgentCallSpli t , m the
RouteSelectRequest. This field should be provided if the routeSelected is directed to a specific agent rather than to any available agent (hunt group.) This field should contain the ACD agent's split/skill if a call is directed to a specific logged-in agent (i.e. the routeSel ected is an agent logm-ID rather than an extension.)
Syntax destVariable = SetDirectedAgen tCal l Spl t (h TelHandl e ,
Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the integer success/failure of the call. hTelHandle Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1) function call. spli t/D This parameter is a string containing the split/skill ID where an agent specified in the routeSelected must be logged in. Return Value
If the set of the directAgentCallSpli t field in the
RouteSelectRequest succeeds, this function returns 0. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns -4001. If the spli tlD parameter is invalid, this function returns
-4002.
Remarks
The spli tlD field of the Rou t eSel ec tReques t is only necessary if the routeSelected field has been directed to a logged in agent (agent login-ID) , rather than an equipment or service extension.
Example - SetDirectedAgentCallSplit [variabl e declara ti ons ]
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1 ) # if the VDN is equal to accounting DNIS, route to agent login-ID 3501 if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "2222" ) then SetRouteSelecte ( hTelHandle, "3501") # The specified agent login-ID (3501) will be logged into skill hunt group "2000"
SetDirectedAgentCallSplit ( hTelHandle, "2000") else # if VDN is marketing DNIS, route to mktg hunt group extension if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "3333" ) then SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, "3100") endif endif
# define parameters required to route call SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0 )
RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) Function SetNumericFieldValue
The SetNumericFieldValue function sets the specified field name of the "current" database record to the integer value passed in as a parameter. A current database record must be identified using the RunQuery operation before accessing fields within the record.
Syntax destVariable =SetNumericFieldValue (hDBHandle , fieldName, setValue)
Part Description destVariable Variable receiving the string field result from the operation hDBHandle Variable that receives the allocated database handle fi el dName Parameter of string type containing record field name to retrieve setValue Parameter of integer type defining value to set the field to
Return Value
Returns 0 if successful, -5008 for an invalid database handle. This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Some of the more common errors returned by Btrieve are covered in the IIR trouble shooting guide.
Remarks
The SetNumericFieldValue function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the Crea teDBHandle function, and a "current" record being defined through the RunQuery function call.
Example - SetNumericFieldValue [variabl e declara tions]
INVALID_HNDL = 0; RETOK=0; END_OF_FILE = -9 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if ( hDBHandle == INVALID _ HNDL) then perform defa ul t route processi ng else nRet = RunQuery( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=", GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle
# while the field is equal to the key, set acctFound field do
SetNumericFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "AccCount", 2 )
UpdateRecord ( hDBHandle ) nRet = MoveNextRecord ( hDBHandle ) if (nRet == RETOK ) then acctNo = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "AccountNo") endif while (nRet <> END_OF_FILE And acctNo GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) ) endif route call to defa ul t cal l processing VDN DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle )
Function SetOutgomgUUI
The SetOutgomgUUI function allows the IIR script to associate caller information, up to 32 bytes, with a call.
This information can be any meaningful data (such as account no, social security number, etc.) that is an alphanumeric string. It is propagated with the call whether the call is routed locally or is interflowed to another switch. Providing expected data to an awaiting VDN if the data is known in the IIR script.
Syntax destVariabl e = SetOutgomgUUI (h TelHandl e, UUIType . UUILength , UUIDa ta )
Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the integer success/failure of the call. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call. UUI Type This parameter is an integer value that specifies the codeType. The possible values are as follows:
-1 = UUI_NONE (indicates UUI not specified)
0 = UUI_USER_SPECIFIC (not supported for IIR release 1.0)
4 = UUI_ IA5_ASC11 (ASCII string supported by IIR)
UUILength This parameter is an integer value that represents the string length stored in the UUIData field (does not count null tertiinator. )
UUIDa ta This parameter is a string of up to 32 bytes in length containing alphanumeric data to be the UUI associated with this call record.
Return Value
If the set of the UserToUserlnfo field in the RouteSeiectReguest succeeds, this function returns 0. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns -4001. If any of the parameters are inconsistent or invalid, this function returns -4002. Remarks
The UserToUserlnfo structure the Route Select structure can be used to send along with the call pertinent information concerning the call or caller. This data field is generic and is sent along with a call transfer either locally on the PBX or when interflowed. It is important to understand that this information must be understood by the destination, whether that be another IIR script or other adjunct, and the user must make sure that the destinations for the call routing are not expecting other UserToUserlnfo in this field.
The initial version of the IIR only supports the UUI_IA5_ASCII (4) UUIType. The IIR scripts are not able to manipulate binary data in this release.
Example - SetOutgomgUUI
[variable declarati ons] UUI _ ASCII = 4; C0LL_VDN ="3000"
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) # if the VDN is equal to accounting DNIS, route to
VDN that will collect phone number if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "2222" ) then
SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, COLL_VDN ) ANI = GetCallingDevice ( hTelHandle ) # if the callers ANI is known pass it to the next IIR script if (ANI <>"") then
SetOutgomgUUI ( hTelHandle, UUI_ASCII, ICRLStrLen (ANI) , ANI) endif endif
# define parameters required to route call SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0 RouteFinal ( hTelHandle )
Function SetPri oπ ty Call
The SetPriorityCall function is used to specify the priority calling field in the RouteSelectRequest. This parameter is placed the Route Select Service message (Version 2), pri ori tyCallmg, field and s a required component of the message before the IIR can send the Route Select message.
Syntax destVariable = SetPriorityCall ( h TelHandl e , pri ori ty)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer success/failure of the call. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call. routeSel ected This parameter is, an integer specifying the priority of the on- PBX call as either "On" (1) or "Off" (0) .
Return Value
If the set of the pri ori tyCalling field in the RouteSeiectReguest succeeds, this function returns 0. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns -4001. If the routeSel ected parameter is invalid, this function returns -4002.
Remarks The pri ori tyCalling field is one of two mandatory fields that must be set before the route request being returned from the IIR. This function must be called before calling either of the RouteFinal or RouteMore functions.
The value must be set to "Off" (0) for all off-PBX specified destinations in the routeSel ected field. If this is not done, the call will be denied.
Example - SetPriorityCall
[variable declara tions]
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 ) # if the VDN is equal to accounting DNIS, route to acct hunt group extension if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "2222" ) then SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, "3000") else # if VDN is marketing DNIS, route to mktg hunt group extension if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "3333") then
SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, "3100") endif endif
# define parameters required to route call SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0 ) RouteFinal ( hTelHandle )
Function SetRoute Selected
The SetRouteSelected function is used to specify the destination route field the RouteSelectRequest, which can be an extension, VDN, hunt group, or external number. This parameter is placed in the Route Select Service message (Version 2), routeSelected field and is a required component of the message before the IIR can send the Route Select message. Syntax destVari abl e SetRou teSel ect ed (h TelHandl e , routeSelected)
Part Description destVariable Variable that receives the integer success/failure of the call. hTelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call. routeSelected This parameter J S a string containing the routing specification for the call. This can be an extension, or if an off- PBX number, it can also contain the TAC/ARS/AAR -oute control information.
Return Value
If the set of the rou teSel ected field in the RouteSel ectRequest succeeds, this function returns 0. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns -4001. If the routeSelected parameter is invalid, this function returns -4002.
Remarks
The routeSel ected field of the RouteSel ectRequest is one of two mandatory fields that must be set before the route request being returned from the IIR. This function must be called before calling either of the RouteFinal or RouteMore functions. The data provided in this field can be an extension (representing an extension, agent login-ID, hunt group, or VDN) , or if an off-PBX number, can also contain the TAC/ARS/AAR route control information. Example - SetRouteSelected
[variabl e declarations] # obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
# if the VDN is equal to accounting DNIS, route to acct hunt group extension if (GetVDN ( hTelHandle ) == "2222" ) then SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, "3000") else # if VDN is marketing DNIS, route to mktg hunt group extension if (GetVDN ( hTelHandle ) == "3333") then
SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, "3100") endif endif # define parameters required to route call
SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0 ) RouteFinal ( hTelHandle)
Function SetStringFi eldVal ue The SetStringFi eldVal ue function sets the specified field name of the "current" database record to the string value passed in as a parameter. A current database record must be identified using the RunQuery operation before accessing fields withm the record.
Syntax destVariable = SetStringFi el dVal ue (hDBHandl e, fi eldName, setVal ue)
Part Description destVariable Variable receiving the string field result from the operation hDBHandl e Variable that receives the allocated database handle fi el dName Parameter of string type containing record field name to retrieve setVal ue Parameter of string type defining value to set the field to
Return Value Returns 0 if successful, -5008 for an invalid database handle. This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Some of the more common errors returned by Btrieve are covered in the IIR trouble shooting guide.
Remarks
The SetStringFi eldVal ue function cannot be called before a database handle being obtained through the Crea teDBHandl e function, and a "current" record being defined through the RunQuery function call.
Example - SetStringFieldValue [variable declarations] INVALID_HNDL = 0; RETOK=0; END_OF_FILE = -9 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle () hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if (hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL) then perform defaul t route processing else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "~" , GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) )
# while the field is equal to the key, set acctFound field do
SetStringFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "AcctNotes", "ACCT LOCATED") UpdateRecord ( hDBHandle ) nRet = MoveNextRecord ( hDBHandle ) if (nRet == RETOK) then acctNo = GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "AccountNo") endif while (nRet <> END_OF_FILE And acctNo = GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) ) endif route call to defa ul t call processing VDN DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle )
Function Set UserProvidedCode The SetUserProvidedCode function allows the IIR script to send code/digits (ASCII string with 0-9, * , and # only) with the routed call. These code/digits are treated as dial-ahead digits stored in the dial-ahead digit buffer.
They can then be collected by subsequent collect digit vector commands on the switch. This function provides expected data to an awaiting VDN if the data is known in the
IIR script.
Syntax destVariabl e = Set UserProvi dedCode ( (h TelHandl e, codeType , codeDa ta)
Part Description destVariabl e Variable that receives the integer success/failure of the call. h TelHandl e Telephony handle obtained from
ICRLAtoi ($1 ) function call. codeType This parameter is an integer value that specifies the codeType.
Values include:
0 = UP_NONE (indicates UPC not present) 17 = UP_DATA_BASE_PROVIDED IIR input, for instance) codeDa ta String of up to 24 numeric characters making up code/digits to be placed in dial-ahead digit buffer upon RouteSelect (0-9, * , #)
Return Value
If the set of the UserProvi dedCode field in the
RouteSel ectRequest succeeds, this function returns 0. For an invalid telephony handle, the function returns -4001. If any of the parameters are inconsistent or invalid, this function returns -4002.
Remarks
The UserProvidedCode structure in the Route Sel ect structure can be used to "feed" a subsequent VDN/vector known code/digits that would otherwise be collected from the caller. In the case where the data is known by the IIR, there is no need to prompt the caller for the data, and with this method the caller would not be prompted in the subsequent vector if the digits were already placed there for the caller.
Example - SetUserProvidedCode [variable declara tions]
DB_PROVIDED = 17; C0LL_VDN ="3000"
# obtain telephony handle by converting call ID to numeric value hTellHandle = ICRLAtoi ( $1 )
# if the VDN is equal to accounting DNIS, route to
VDN that will collect phone number if (GetVDN( hTelHandle ) == "2222" ) then SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, COLL VDN)
.ANI = GetCallingDevice ( hTelHandle )
# if the callers ANI is known, go ahead and put in type ahead buffer if (ANI <> "") then
SetUserProvidedCode ( hTelHandle, DB_PROVIDED, ANI) endif endif
# define parameters required to route call SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0 ) RouteFinal ( hTelHandle )
Function Upda teRecord
The UpdateRecord function updates a record in the database that has been located through the RunQuery or MoveNextRecord/MovePreviousRecord functions. The record to be updated, once located, will have the targeted fields modified through the SetStringFi eldVal ue and
SetNumericFi eldVal ue functions, before update.
Syntax destVariabl e = UpdateRecord(hDBHandle) Part Description destVariable Variable receiving integer value representing success/failure of call. hDBHandl e Variable that receives the allocated database handle
Return Value Returns 0 if successful, for an invalid database handle the function returns -5008. This function can also return errors in the range of -1 to -2000, which are negated error codes returned by Btrieve. Remarks
The LTpdateRecord function cannot be called before obtaining a database handle through the Crea teDBHandle function, and defining a "current" record through the RunQuery function call.
The fields that are intended for update can be modified using the SetStringFieldVal ue or SetNumericFi eldVal ue . Once the fields have been modified, the record is updated in the database by calling this function, Upda teRecord.
Example - UpdateRecord
[variabl e declara tions]
INVALID_HNDL = 0; RETOK=0 hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle, do default route processing if (hDBHandle == INVALID _ HNDL) then perform defaul t route processing else nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=", GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) ) # If the Query returned return OK, then modify the record and update it if ( nRet == RETOK ) then
SetStringFieldValue (hDBHandle, "CustStatus", "LOCATED") if (UpdateRecord (hDBHandle) <> RETOK) then process error on updating record endif endif endif
DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle
APPENDIX B - SAMPLE SCRIPTS The following scripts are samples for you to use in writing your own scripts.
Sample #1
#
# Test Script Name: VDN.icr #
# Test Script Description: This script tests the following
# *GetVDN
#
# declare variables global $0, $1 global g_pICRLExecuteContext
local hTelHandle # Telephony Handle local hDbHandle # Handle to the Database local nRet,vdn local RETOK local INVALID_HNDL # to be set to 0 for return of invalid handle local DEFAULT_RTE # set to the default VDN local ROUTEMR_RTE # route more route local OTHER RTE
#ιnιtιalιze variables
RETOK = 0 INVALID_HNDL = 0 DEFAULT_RTE = "2088" ROUTEMR_RTE = "3008" OTHER RTE = "3006" # begin code, Route Request has arrived
hDbHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLatoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle or t.elephony handle, then route to default location if ( hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL Or hTelHandle == INVALID_HNDL ) then nRet = SetRouteSelected { hTelHandle, DEFAULT_RTE ) nRet = SetPriorityCall) hTelHandle, 0) nRet = RouteFinal ( hTelHandle) else println "VDN = "+ GetVDN (hTelHandle) println "Calling Device = "+ GetCallingDevice (hTelHandle)
vdn = GetVDN (hTelHandle) Select Case (vdn)
Case ("2098") SetRouteSelected (hTelHandle, ROUTEMR_RTE)
RouteMore (hTelHandle) println "Routed to " + ROUTEMR_RTE
SetPriorityCall (hTelHandle, 1) ; RouteFinal (hTelHandle) ;
End Case Case ("2099")
SetRouteSelected (hTelHandle , "DEFAULT_RTE") RouteMore (hTelHandle ι println "Routed to" + DEFAULT RTE SetPriorityCall (hTelHandle, 1) ;
RouteFinal (hTelHandle) ; End Case Case ("3006")
SetRouteSelected (hTelHandle, "OTHER_RTE")
RouteMore (hTelHandle)
SetPriorityCall; hTelHandle, 1); RouteFinal (hTelHandle) ;
End Case End Select endif println "vdn.icr Done" # eof
Sample #2
# # # Test Script Name: LIVE1.ICR # # Test Script Description: This script will perform several # operations: # * if it's after 5:30 pm it will transfer to VDN <??>
# for a message # * if there is a ForceExtension entered, it will # route to that ext. # * otherwise, based upon the outstanding balance it # will route to two different VDNs (if acctBal > # 10000 then overdrawn, else default ext) . # # # declare variables global $0, $1 $0 is the name of the script, $1 is the script identification number local hDBHandle # Handle to the DataBase local hTelHandle # Telephony handle local hTimeHandle # Time handle local nRet # Return Value variable local queryStr # Query String to pass in to Query DB local RETOK # To be set to 0 for return OK from function calls local INVALID_HNDL # To be set to 0 for return of invalid handle local DEFAULT_RTE # Set to default VDN or extension to route to when a critical error occurs local AFTERHR RTE, HIGHBAL RTE
#initialize variables RETOK = 0
INVALID_HNDL = 0 DEFAULT_RTE = "3003" AFTERHR_RTE = "2088" HIGHBAL_RTE = "2087"
#begin code hTimeHandle = CreateTimeHandle ( )
GetCurrentTime (hTimeHandle) println "Entered Script at " + GetAscTime (hTimeHandle)
# Create DataBase, Telephone, and Time Handles hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) GetCurrentTime (hTimeHandle) println "DB Handle Obtained at " + GetAscTime; (hTimeHandle) hTelHandle - ICRLAtoi ($1)
# If unable to create a database handle or telephony handle, then route to default location if ( hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL Or hTelHandle == INVALID_HNDL
Or hTimeHandle
INVALID HNDL) then println "Invalid time or telephone handle, DBhandle hDBHandle + "timeHandle =" + hTimeHandle nRet = SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, DEFAULT_RTE ) nRet = SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) nRet = RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) else
GetCurrentTime (hTimeHandle) # # Check to see if it is after 5:30, if so route to after hours
VDN println "Hour" + GetHour (hTimeHandle) + "; Mιnute"+GetMιnute (hTimeHandle) if ( GetHour ( hTimeHandle) >17 Or (GetHour (hTimeHandle) =--17 And GetMinute (hTimeHandle) > 30) ) then nRet = SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, AFTERHR_RTE ) nRet = SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) nRet = RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) else
#
# Query the database using the IVRDigits as the
# account no key # nRet = RunQuery ( hDBHandle, "AccountNo", "=", GetlVRDigits (hTelHandle)) println " " println "Customer ID = " + GetlVRDigits ( hTelHandle ) println "Name " + GetStrmgFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "LastName") + ", " + GetStrmgFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "FirstName")
# If the Query returned return OK, then print out the customer information if ( nRet == RETOK ) then if ( GetStrmgFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "ForceExtension") <> "") then println "Routing on Force Extension = " + GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "ForceExtension") nRet = SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, GetStrmgFieldValue (hDBHandle, "ForceExtension") nRet = SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) println "RouteFinal " + RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) else if (GetNumericFieldValue (hDBHandle, "AcctBal") >= 10000 ) then println "Account Balance > 10000 of = " +
GetNumericFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "AcctBal") nRet = SetRouteSelected ( hTelHandle, HIGHBAL_RTE) nRet = SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) println "RouteFinal " + RouteFinal (hTelHandle ) else println "Default routing, acct balance <10000 of = " + GetNumericFieldValue ( hDBHandle, "AcctBal") nRet - SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, DEFAULT_RTE) nRet - SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) println "RouteFinal = "+ RouteFinal (hTelHandle ) endif endif else println "Query returned an error of " + nRet nRet = SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, DEFAULT_RTE ) nRet = SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) println "RouteFinal " + RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) endif # else query returned an error endif # else not after hours endif # else valid handles
GetCurrentTime (hTimeHandle) println "End Script at " + GetAscTime (hTimeHandle) nRet - DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle ) nRet - DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle ) SAMPLE#3
#
# Test Script Name: LookAh.ICR # # Test Script Description: This script tests the telephony look
# ahead functions.
# GetLookAheadType
# GetLookAheadPriority
# GetLookAheadHours # GetLookAheadMinutes
# GetLookAheadSeconds
# GetLookAheadSrcVDN
#
#defιne variables global $0, $1 # $0 is the name of the script, $1 is the script identification number # Handle to the DataBase
# Telephony handle
# Time handle
# Return Value variable
# Query String to pass in to Query DB
# To be set to 0 for return OK from function calls
# To be set to 0 for return of invalid handle
Figure imgf000241_0001
# Set to default VDN or extension to route to when a critical error occurs local OTHER RTE
#ιnιtιalιze variables RETOK = 0 INVALID_ HNDL = 0
DEFAULT _RTE = "2201" OTHER RTE = "3008"
# Create DataBase, Telephone, and Time Handles hDBHandle = CreateDBHandle ( ) hTelHandle = ICRLAtoi ($1) hTimeHandle = CreateTimeHandle ( )
# If unable to create a database handle or telephony handle, then route to default location if ( hDBHandle == INVALID_HNDL Or hTelHandle =-- INVALID_HNDL ) then nRet = SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, DEFAULT_RTE) nRet = SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) nRet = RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) else
# logic for valid state prιntln"VDN = " + GetVDN (hTelHandle) println "LookAheadType = " + GetLookAheadType (hTelHandle) prιntln"Look Ahead Priority " +
GetLookAheadPriority(hTelHandle) pπntln"Look Ahead Hours = " + GetLookAheadHours (hTelHandle) prmtln"Look Ahead Minutes +
GetLookAheadMinutes (hTelHandle) prιntln"Look Ahead Seconds " +
GetLookAheadSeconds (hTelHandle) prmtln"Look Ahead Src VDN + GetLookAheadSrcVDN (hTelHandle) nRet = SetRouteSelected( hTelHandle, OTHER_RTE) nRet = SetPriorityCall ( hTelHandle, 0) nRet = RouteFinal ( hTelHandle ) endif nRet - DestroyDBHandle ( hDBHandle ) nRet - DestroyTimeHandle ( hTimeHandle )
APPENDIX C - TERMS AND ACRONYMS
The terms listed here in Table 17 are defined according to their meaning as related to the Intelligent Information Router.
TABLE 17
ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Phone system designed to answer incoming calls and distribute the calls based on instructions in the database.
Administrator Designated person who is responsible for defining Call Treatment Tables and other program setup features .
Agent Person who is a member of an ACD split extension.
Agent Physical device, usually a telephone or a Instrument headset.
Agent Status Current status of an Agent (Logged In/Out, Work Ready/Not Ready, etc.) .
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) The information passed to the switch, identifying incoming calls. If you also have Caller ID, you can then view the ANI.
Busy Hour Hour of the day during which a telephone system carries the most traffic.
Call Treatment see Call Vector. Call Vector Method that manages inbound calls via the use of routing tables .
Caller ID Service provided by the local and long distance phone companies that identifies and displays information (name and phone number) about an incoming call. See also ANI. CDR (Call Detail Record) Telephone system feature which collects and records information on phone calls, such as phone number, duration, time, date.
CNE (Certified NetWare Engineer) Designation awarded by Novell, Inc. to persons who pass the Novell rating.
CTT (Call Treatement Table [see Call Vector] )
DEFINITY AT&T brand of telephone switching systems.
DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service) For 800 numbers, this service identifies the number the caller dialed for routing purposes .
EAS (Expert Agent Selection) GUI (Graphical User Interface) Standard Windows presentation of application information.
Hunt Group Ordered group of stations.
IIR (Intelligent Information Router) Telephony application that routes incoming calls based on a rules database.
IIR Client IIR system components that run on Windows desktop computers.
IIR IIR-defined Administrator. Administrator
IIR Agent IIR-defined call center Agents.
IIR_Route Call routed via the IIR engine (also see IIR Rule) .
IIR Server IIR system components that run on network servers.
II Digits Call Origination Digits/Identification
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network)
IVR Digits Interactive Voice Response information collected during call vectoring (i.e. prompted or collected digits) NLM (NetWare Loadable Module)
Novell NetWare Novell's network server software.
PBX (Private Branch Exchange) Telephone system within an organization, which supports and operates all the phones and the telephony switch.
PBX_Route Call routed via the DEFINITY PBX (also see PBX vector) .
Router see IIR. Routing Path The flow (path) a call takes to arrive at final desination.
Rule Defined set of trigger events and match criteria.
Station Physical location of an Agent and Agent instrument.
Step Single process/function in Rule. Switch Electronic device that runs the telephone system and PBX. For example, DEFINITY is the AT&T switch.
Telephony Networked server running Novell's NetWare Server Telephony Services software.
UUI (User-to-user Information)
VDN Vector Directory Number
Vector Routing table containing a set of instructions that is used to process incoming calls.
PBX vector indicates processing is performed in the switch. IIR Rule indicates processing is performed in the IIR.
Windows NT® Microsoft's network server software APPENDIX D - ERROR CODES
This appendix provides answers to common questions about installing and using the Intelligent Information Router.
IIR Simulator Errors as Shown in Table 18
Important: Win 32s is required to run the IIR Simulator. Make sure that you have correctly installed Win 32/s before attempting to run the IIR Simulator.
TABLE 18
Figure imgf000245_0001
Figure imgf000246_0001
Figure imgf000247_0001
IIR Database Administration Tool as Shown by Table 19
Important: ODBC is required to run the Database Administration tool. Make sure that you have installed ODBC correctly and that you have an entry in your ODBC setup window (from the Windows Control panel) for ICRBTR.
TABLE 19
Figure imgf000248_0001
Figure imgf000249_0001
IIR Agent Tool as shown by Table 20 Important: ODBC is required to run the Database
Administration tool. Make sure that you have installed ODBC correctly and that you have an entry in your ODBC setup window (from the Windows Control panel) for ICRBTR.
TABLE 20
Figure imgf000250_0001
Figure imgf000251_0001
Error Codes as Shown by Table 21 Time Command Errors
TABLE 21
Figure imgf000251_0002
Error Code Description Possible Resolution
"<INVALID TIME>" Invalid Time This error is returned from the GetAscTime command, usually when the parameter passed to the command was not a valid time handle. A time handle is created by using the CreateTimeHandle () . The value returnee from this command should be passed as an input parameter to all Get Time commands .
Database Error Codes as shown by Table 22
Database commands can return two types of errors: Btrieve Errors and IIR Errors . If the error code returned has a value of -1 to -2000, it is a Btrieve error. Some common Btrieve errors are listed below. Refer to your Btrieve Manuals for a complete listing of errors and resolutions. The error codes are listed m the Btrieve Manuals as positive rather than negative values.
TABLE 22
Figure imgf000253_0001
Figure imgf000254_0001
The following Table 23 contains a list of the IIR Database errors and possible resolutions:
TABLE 23
Figure imgf000254_0002
Figure imgf000255_0001
Error Description Possible Resolution Code
-5006 Field Name not The Field Name used in the Found RunQuery command does not match the Field Names currently defined for the Database.
Use the Database Administration tool to find out -.he currently defined Field Names. Make sure that the Database Administration tool points to the same database that the script is running against.
Use the Windows Control Panel / ODBC setup to dstermine the database location for the Database Administration Tool (ICRBTR) . If you are running the simulator, check the IIR Simulator Database section of the ASI. INI file found in your Windows directory. If you encountered this error while running from the I.ϋR, point the Database Administration tool to the production database located in the IIR/dbdata subdirectory on the IIR server.
Notes: If you change the Database Field Names, you must stop and re¬ start the simulator and IIR NLM before the new Field Names are available to a script.
Database Field Names are case sensitive. Make sure the Field Names used in the Script match exactly the Field Names defined in the Database Administration Tool
Figure imgf000257_0001
Error Description Possible Resolution Code
-5011 Label Database The Labeldef.DTA file has been is Corrupted corrupted.
If running the simulator, verify that the IIR Simulator Database section in the ASI.INI file in your windows directory points to the correct location. If this is correct, it may be necessary to restore this file from a backup. This file contains the Field Names for the database. If you do not have a backup of this file, you will need to perform the following steps to create an empty Labeldef.DTA file.
1. Backup your production database.
2. Re-install the IIR NLM. This will create an empty database.
3. Save off the empty Labeldef.DTA f le.
4. Restore the previously backup database.
5. Copy the empty Labeldef.DTA file over the corrupted file.
6. Use the Database Administration Tool to define your database labels. Error Description Possible Resolution Code
"<INVALID GetStringField This error is returned from the STRINO" Value failed GetStrmgFieldValue command. There are two common causes for this error:
Database Handle passed is invalid.
Check to see that your Database
Handle is valid. Use the
CreateDbHandle command to create the database handle. If your a handle was created by the CreateDbHandle command, make sure that your script is not altering the value of the variable. Use "=--" (double =) for all comparison operations. A single
= will change the value of the variable on the left.
The Field Name passed is not a valid field name in the database. Use the Database Administration tool to see the currently defined Field Names. The Database Administration tool must point to the same database that the script is running against. Use the Windows Control Panel / ODBC setup to determine the database location for the Database Administration Tool (ICRBTR) . If you are running the simulator, check the IIR Simulator Database section of the ASI. INI file found in your Windows directory. If this error was encountered while running from the IIR, point the Database Administration tool to the production database located in the IIR/DBDATA sub-directory on the IIR server. Error Description Possible Resolution Code
Notes: If you change the Database Field Names, you must, stop and re¬ start the simulator and IIR NLM before the new Field Names are available to a script.
Database Field Names are case sensitive. Make sure the Field Names used in the Script match exactly the Field Names defined in the Database Administration Tool .
- 99999 GetNumeric This error is returned from the Field Value GetNumericFieldValue command. failed There are two common causes for this error:
Database Handle passed is invalid. Check to make sure that the Database Handle you are passing is a valid handle. Use the CreateDbHandle command to create the database handle. If you are using a handle that v/as created by the CreateDbHandle command, make sure that your script is not altering the value of the variable. Make sure you are using "==" (double =) for all comparison operations. A single = will change the value of the variable on the left.
The Field Name passed is not a valid field name in the database. Use the Database Administration tool to find out the currently defined Field Names. Make sure that the Database Administration tool is pointed to the same database that the script is Error Description Possible Resolution Code running against. Use the Windows Control Panel ODBC setup to determine the database location for the Database Administration Tool (ICRBTR) . If you are running the simulator, check the IIR Simulator Database section of the ASI.INI file found in your Windows directory. If this error was encountered while running from the IIR, point the Database Administration tool to the production database located in the IIR/DBDATA sub-directory on the IIR server.
Notes:
If you change the Database Field Names, you must stop and re-start the simulator and IIR NLM before the new Field Names are available to a script.
Database Field Names are case sensitive. Make sure the Field Names used in the Script match exactly the Field Names defined in the Database Administration Tool.
Telephony Error Codes Telephony commands can return four types of errors: Local ACS Errors, Tserver ACS Errors, Tserver CSTA Errors, and IIR Errors. Note: Any object used as the Destination for a Route command is considered a device. The device may be a VDN, Agent Extension, Agent Login ID, or Hunt Group. All Devices must be administered using the Telephony Services Administration tool before they are recognized by the IIR.
VDNs used to accept Inbound calls and VDNs used as the destination of a RouteMore command must have Route Sessions initiated before being recognized by the IIR. Use the VDN Administration Tool to start and stop Route Sessions.
Local ACS Errors
If the error code returned has a value of -1 to -99, it is a Local ACS error. Refer to your Telephony Services Manuals for a description and resolution.
Tserver ACS Errors
If the error code returned has a value of 100 to 1999, it is a Tserver ACS Error. Refer to your Telephony Services Manuals for a description and resolution. The errors are listed in the Telephony Services manual under an Error Code that is 100 less than the error code returned by the IIR. In Example 29, if 100 is returned by the IIR,. look for 0 in the Telephony Services Manuals.
EXAMPLE 29
Figure imgf000263_0001
CSTA Tserver Errors If the error code returned has a value of 2000 to 2999, it is a Tserver CSTA Error. Some common CSTA errors are listed below. Refer to your Telephony Services manuals for a complete listing of errors and resolutions. The errors are listed in the Telephony Services manual under an Error Code that is 2000 less than the error code returned by the IIR. In Example 30, if 2000 is returned by the IIR, look for 0 in the Telephony Services Manuals.
Common CSTA Errors
EXAMPLE 30
Figure imgf000264_0001
IIR Telephony Errors
The following Table 24 contains a list of the IIR Telephony errors and possible resolutions: TABLE 24
Figure imgf000265_0001
Figure imgf000266_0001
Figure imgf000267_0001
Figure imgf000268_0001
Miscellaneous Low Level Error Codes are Shown by Table 25
TABLE 25
Figure imgf000269_0001
Figure imgf000270_0001
Error Description Possible Resolution Code
-208 Semaphore The RouteMore command uses Time-out Semaphores to control the amount of the IIR waits before terminating the command. A Semaphore time out in response to a RouteMore command means that the call did not complete the VDN processing and return to the IIR within the amount of time allowed.
There are several possible reasons for this error:
Make sure the RouteMoreTimer parameter in the IIRTEL section of the CTI.CFG file on the IIR server is set correctly. This parameter controls the number of seconds that the IIR will wait before timing out the RouteMore request.
The DestinationVDN used in the RouteMore request is not programmed to send the call back to the IIR.
The caller terminated the call.
-209 Semaphore Low level error. This error is already owned usually accompanied by other errors in the log file which provide more specific information.
-210 Semaphore not Low level error. This error is owned usually accompanied by other errors in the log file which provide more specific information.
211 Invalid Low level error. This error is Resource Sign usually accompanied by other errors in the log file which provide more specific information.
Figure imgf000272_0001
Error Description Possible Resolution Code file located in the IIR directory on the server. Make sure that this entry points the correct file. This is normally setup to point the CTIERR.MSG file located in the same directory as the IIR NLM software.
-219 Message Read Check the CTIERR.MSG file and make Error sure it has not been corrupted. It may be necessary to restore this file from a backup, or Re¬ install the IIR software.
If this error is reported from the IIR Simulator, check the MsgFile keyword in the Log section of your ASI.INI file located in the windows directory. Make sure that this entry points the correct file. This is normally setup to point the CTIERR.MSG file located in the same directory as the IIR Simulator software.
If this error is reported from the IIR NLM, check the MsgFile keyword in the Log section of the CTI.CFG file located in the IIR directory on the server. Make sure that this entry points the correct file. This is normally setup to point the CTIERR.MSG file located in the same directory as the IIR NLM software.
-220 Message Not Informational Message. Found
-221 Duplicate Low level error. This error is Handle usually accompanied by other errors in the log file which provide more specific information.
Figure imgf000274_0001
Figure imgf000275_0001
Figure imgf000276_0001

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. An apparatus for routing an external event, comprising:
a telephony controller in communication with a telephone switching station, the telephony controller, in response to an external event of the telephone switching station, operable to get a handle associated with the external event, the handle comprising a script identifier;
an external data manager m communication with an external link, the external data manager, in response to an external event of the external link, operable to get a handle associated with the external event, the handle comprising a script identifier;
a script interpreter engine m communication with the telephony controller and the external data manager, the script interpreter engine, in response to receiving a script identifier, operable to get a script handle associated with the script identifier, retrieve from a script storage a script associated with the script handle, and to invoke the script to render an output event for the external event; and a handle manager in communication with the telephony controller, the script interpreter engine, and the external data manager, the handle manager operable to store handles and script handles.
2. The apparatus of Claim 1, further comprising a database system, the database system comprising:
a database controller in communication with the script interpreter engine and the handle manager, the database controller, in response to the output event, operable to access a database engine; and the database engine operable to access a database storage to retrieve database information associated with the external event.
3. The apparatus of Claim 2, further comprising an agent station, the agent station comprising::
a communication link operable to receive the external event; and
a display operable to display the database information associated with the external event.
4. The apparatus of Claim 1, further comprising an administration station, the administraition station comprising:
a router administrator operable to receive a simulator script;
a system simulator comprising;
a user interface operable to receive a simulator external event;
a simulator telephony controller in communication with the user interface, the simulator telephony controller, in response to an simulator external event from the user interface, operable to get a simulator handle associated with the simulator external event, the simulator handle comprising a simulator script identifier;
a simulator external data manager in communication with a simulator external link, the simulator external data manager, in response to a simulator external event from the simulator external link, operable to get a simulator handle associated with the simulator external event, the simulator handle comprising a simulator script identifier;
a simulator script interpreter engine in communication with the simulator telephony controller and the simulator external data manager, the simulator script interpreter engine, in response to receiving a simulator script identifier, operable to get a simulator script handle associated with the simulator script identifier, retrieve from a simulator script storage a simulator script associated with the simulator script handle, and to invoke the simulator script to render a simulator output event for said simulator external event;
a simulator handle manager in communication with the simulator telephony controller, the simulator script interpreter engine, and the simulator external data manager, the simulator handle manager operable to store simulator handles and simulator script handles; and
the router administrator operable to download the simulator script as a script to the script storage.
5. The apparatus of Claim 4, further comprising: a database system, the database system comprising: a database controller in communication with the script interpreter engine and the handle manager, the database controller, in response to the output event, operable to access a database engine;
the database engine operable to access a database storage to retrieve database information associated with the external event; and the administration station further comprising a database administrator operable to receive information and to download the information to the database storage.
6. The apparatus of Claim 5, further comprising an agent station, the agent station comprising:
a communication link operable to receive the external event; and
a display operable to display the database information associated with the external event.
7. The apparatus of Claim 6, further comprising: a network comprising:
a network interface m communication with the script interpretation engine and the handle manager; and a link coupled to the agent station, the administration station, and the network interface, the link operable to communicate between the agent station, the administration station, and the network interface.
8. The apparatus of Claim 1, further comprising: a time utility operable to commence and monitor time-based events;
a string parse utility operable to preform string searches and to parse data; and
an input/output utility operable to access the script storage.
9. The apparatus of Claim 1, the external event further comprising a telephony communication.
10. The apparatus of Claim 1, the output event further comprising a telephony route select.
11. The apparatus of Claim 1, the external event further comprising a stock price.
12. The apparatus of Claim 1, the output event further comprising a buy/sell command.
13. The apparatus of Claim 1, the script identifier further comprising a script file name.
14. The apparatus of Claim 1, further comprising: the script handle comprising a reference count indicating a status of the script; and
the handle manager operable to delete from the script storage a script having a script handle with a predefined reference count.
15. The apparatus of Claim 1, further comprising: the script handle comprising a reference count; the script interpreter engine operable to adjust the reference count of the script handle to indicate a status of the script; and
the handle manager operable to delete from the script storage a script having a script handle with a predefined reference count.
16. The apparatus of Claim 1, further comprising: the script handle comprising a reference count indicating a status of the script; the script interpreter engine, in response to receiving a script identifier, operable to increment the reference count of the script handle associated with the script identifier;
the script interpreter engine, in response to invoking the script, operable to decrement the reference count of the script handle associated with the script; and the handle manager operable to delete from the script storage a script having a script handle with a predefined reference count.
17. An apparatus for routing a telephone communication, comprising:
a telephony controller in communication with a telephone switching station, the telephony controller, in response to a telephony communication of the telephone switching station, operable to get a handle associated with the route request, the handle comprising a script identifier;
a script interpreter engine in communication with the telephony controller, the script interpreter engine, in response to receiving a script identifier, operable to get a script handle associated with the script identifier, retrieve from a script storage a script associated with the script handle, and to invoke the script to render an output event for the telephony communication; and
a handle manager in communication with the telephony controller and the script interpreter engine, the handle manager operable to store handles and script handles.
18. The apparatus of Claim 17, further comprising a database system, the database system comprising:
a database controller in communication with the script interpreter engine and the handle manager, the database controller, m response to the output event, operable to access a database engine; and
the database engine operable to access a database storage to retrieve database information associated with the telephony communication.
19. The apparatus of Claim 18, further comprising an agent station, the agent station comprising:
a communication link operable to receive the telephony communication; and
a display operable to display the database information associated with the telephony communication.
20. The apparatus of Claim 17, further comprising an administration station, the administration station comprising:
a router administrator operable to receive a simulator script;
a system simulator comprising;
a user interface operable to receive a simulator telephony communication;
a simulator telephony controller in communication with the user interface, the simulator telephony controller, in response to an simulator telephony communication from the user interface, operable to get a simulator handle associated with the simulator telephony communication, the simulator handle comprising a simulator script identifier;
a simulator script interpreter engine in communication with the simulator telephony controller and the simulator script interpreter engine, in response to receiving a simulator script identifier, operable to get a simulator script handle associated with the simulator script identifier, retrieve from a simulator script storage a simulator script associated with the simulator script handle, and to invoke the simulator script to render a simulator output event for said simulator telephony communication;
a simulator handle manager in communication with the simulator telephony controller and the simulator script interpreter engine, the simulator handle manager operable to store simulator handles and simulator script handles; and
the router administrator operable to download the simulator script as a script to the script storage.
21. The apparatus of Claim 20, further comprising: a database system, the database system comprising: a database controller in communication with the script interpreter engine and the handle manager, the database controller, in response to the output event, operable to access a database engine;
the database engine operable to access a database storage to retrieve database information associated with the telephony communication; and the administration station further comprising a database administrator operable to receive information and to download the information to the database storage.
22. The apparatus of Claim 21, further comprising an agent station, the agent station comprising:
a communication link operable to receive the telephony communication; and
a display operable to display the database information associated with the telephony communication.
23. The apparatus of Claim 22, further comprising: a network comprising:
a network interface in communication with the script interpretation engine and the handle manager; and a link coupled to the agent station, the administration station, and the network interface, the link operable to communicate between the agent station, the administration station, and the network interface.
24. The apparatus of Claim 17, further comprising: a time utility operable to commence and monitor time-based events;
a string parse utility operable to preform string searches and to parse data; and
an input/output utility operable to access the script storage.
25. The apparatus of Claim 17, the output event further comprising a telephony route select.
26. The apparatus of Claim 17, the script identifier further comprising a script file name.
27. The apparatus of Claim 17, further comprising: the script handle comprising a reference count indicating a status of the script; and
the handle manager operable to delete from the script storage a script having a script handle with a predefined reference count.
28. The apparatus of Claim 17, further comprising: the script handle comprising a reference count; the script interpreter engine operable to adjust the reference count of the script handle to indicate a status of the script; and
the handle manager operable to delete from the script storage a script having a script handle with a predefined reference count.
29. The apparatus of Claim 17, further comprising: the script handle comprising a reference count indicating a status of the script;
the script interpreter engine, m response to receiving a script identifier, operable to increment the reference count of the script handle associated with the script identifier;
the script interpreter engine, in response to invoking the script, operable to decrement the reference count of the script handle associated with the script; and the handle manager operable to delete from the script storage a script having a script handle with a predefined reference count.
30. A method of storing scripts, comprising the steps of:
associating a reference count with a script; adjusting the reference count to indicate a status of the script; and
deleting the script from a script storage when a predefined reference count is reached.
31. The method of Claim 30, further comprising the steps of:
incrementing the reference count upon creation of the script;
incrementing the reference count for each activation of the script;
decrementing the reference count for each deactivation of the script; and
decrementing the reference count when the script becomes outdated.
32. The method of Claim 30, further comprising the steps of:
incrementing the reference count by one upon creation of the script;
incrementing the reference count by one for each activation of the script;
decrementing the reference count by one for each deactivation of the script; decrementing the reference count by one when the script becomes outdated; and
deleting the script when the reference count is zero.
33. A method of executing a script, comprising the steps of:
placing parameters of a function onto a hardware stack;
calling the function; and
executing the function on the parameters on the stack.
34. The method of Claim 33, wherein the function is called and executed by invoking a script to which the function is bound.
35. The method of Claim 33, further comprising the steps of:
marking a position of the hardware stack after placing the parameters on the hardware stack; and
clearing the stack to the marked position.
36. A method of routing a telephone communication, comprising the steps of:
receiving a route request;
getting a telephony handle for the route request; determining a script identifier from the telephony handle; and invoking a script associated with the script identifier to render an output event for the telephone communication.
37. The method of Claim 36, further comprising the steps of:
getting a script handle of the script associated with the script identifier; and
using the script handle to invoke the script.
38. The method of Claim 36, wherein the output event comprises a telephony route select.
39. The method of Claim 36, wherein the output event comprises a request for database records.
40. The method of Claim 36, wherein the script identifier comprises a script file name.
41. A method of routing an external event, comprising the steps of:
receiving an external event;
getting a handle for the an external event;
using the handle, determining a script identifier; and
invoking a script associated with the script identifier to render an output event for the external event.
42. The method of Claim 41, further comprising the steps of: getting a script handle of the script associated with the script identifier; and
using the script handle to invoke the script.
43. The method of Claim 41, wherein the external event comprises a telephony communication.
44. The method of Claim 41, wherein the output event comprises a telephony route select.
45. The method of Claim 41, wherein the external event comprises a stock price.
46. The method of Claim 41, wherein the output event comprises a buy/sell command.
47. The method of Claim 41, wherein the output event comprises a request for database records.
48. The method of Claim 41, wherein the script identifier comprises a script file name.
PCT/US1996/018156 1995-11-13 1996-11-13 Intelligent information routing system and method WO1997018661A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU11190/97A AU1119097A (en) 1995-11-13 1996-11-13 Intelligent information routing system and method

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US666395P 1995-11-13 1995-11-13
US60/006,663 1995-11-13

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1997018661A1 true WO1997018661A1 (en) 1997-05-22

Family

ID=21722001

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1996/018156 WO1997018661A1 (en) 1995-11-13 1996-11-13 Intelligent information routing system and method

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (2) US5870464A (en)
AU (1) AU1119097A (en)
WO (1) WO1997018661A1 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7286661B1 (en) 2007-05-01 2007-10-23 Unison Technologies Llc Systems and methods for scalable hunt-group management
US7631198B2 (en) * 2005-05-10 2009-12-08 Seagate Technology Protocol scripting language for safe execution in embedded system
US7783023B2 (en) 2007-05-16 2010-08-24 Unison Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for providing unified collaboration systems with conditional communication handling
US9042372B2 (en) 1998-09-24 2015-05-26 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Call transfer using session initiation protocol (SIP)
USRE46675E1 (en) 2001-08-10 2018-01-16 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Integrating SIP control messaging into existing communication center routing infrastructure
US11792091B1 (en) 2017-10-12 2023-10-17 United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) Reconnection routing for service sessions

Families Citing this family (162)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
SE9404294D0 (en) * 1994-12-09 1994-12-09 Ellemtel Utvecklings Ab manner and device in telecommunications
WO1997018661A1 (en) * 1995-11-13 1997-05-22 Answersoft, Inc. Intelligent information routing system and method
US5867562A (en) * 1996-04-17 1999-02-02 Scherer; Gordon F. Call processing system with call screening
US6975708B1 (en) * 1996-04-17 2005-12-13 Convergys Cmg Utah, Inc. Call processing system with call screening
DE19626131A1 (en) * 1996-06-28 1998-01-08 Sel Alcatel Ag Method for introducing a telecommunications service as well as service unit, service computer, terminal and communication network
FR2754413B1 (en) * 1996-10-07 2000-08-04 Alsthom Cge Alcatel CALL DISTRIBUTION ARRANGEMENT
US7031442B1 (en) 1997-02-10 2006-04-18 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Methods and apparatus for personal routing in computer-simulated telephony
US6064667A (en) * 1997-02-10 2000-05-16 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Apparatus and methods enhancing call routing to and within call centers
US6104802A (en) 1997-02-10 2000-08-15 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. In-band signaling for routing
US6480600B1 (en) 1997-02-10 2002-11-12 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Call and data correspondence in a call-in center employing virtual restructuring for computer telephony integrated functionality
US6205412B1 (en) * 1997-07-09 2001-03-20 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Methods in computer simulation of telephony systems
US5973734A (en) 1997-07-09 1999-10-26 Flashpoint Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for correcting aspect ratio in a camera graphical user interface
JP3544457B2 (en) * 1997-08-22 2004-07-21 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション Method and apparatus for creating GUI on client using e-mail or agent, and recording medium recording program for that
US6163816A (en) * 1997-08-29 2000-12-19 Flashpoint Technology, Inc. System and method for retrieving capability parameters in an electronic imaging device
US6985943B2 (en) 1998-09-11 2006-01-10 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for extended management of state and interaction of a remote knowledge worker from a contact center
US6711611B2 (en) 1998-09-11 2004-03-23 Genesis Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for data-linking a mobile knowledge worker to home communication-center infrastructure
US6385202B1 (en) * 1997-10-01 2002-05-07 At&T Corp. Method and system for allowing access to traditional voice mail and interactive voice response systems over internet-like networks
US5960442A (en) * 1997-11-12 1999-09-28 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Real-time interactive directory
USRE46528E1 (en) 1997-11-14 2017-08-29 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Implementation of call-center outbound dialing capability at a telephony network level
US6311164B1 (en) * 1997-12-30 2001-10-30 Job Files Corporation Remote job application method and apparatus
US7907598B2 (en) 1998-02-17 2011-03-15 Genesys Telecommunication Laboratories, Inc. Method for implementing and executing communication center routing strategies represented in extensible markup language
US6801520B2 (en) * 1998-02-17 2004-10-05 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Queue prioritization based on competitive user input
US6332154B2 (en) 1998-09-11 2001-12-18 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for providing media-independent self-help modules within a multimedia communication-center customer interface
US6102970A (en) * 1998-03-27 2000-08-15 Davox Corporation System and method for optimizing a program containing a number of the flows through flow branches
US6173244B1 (en) * 1998-04-09 2001-01-09 Lucent Technologies, Inc. System and method for testing a switching system in a telecommunication network
US6292550B1 (en) * 1998-06-01 2001-09-18 Avaya Technology Corp. Dynamic call vectoring
US7006620B1 (en) 1998-06-12 2006-02-28 Sbc Properties, L.P. System and method for routing both toll-free and caller-paid telephone calls to call service centers
US6105039A (en) * 1998-06-23 2000-08-15 Microsoft Corporation Generation and validation of reference handles
US6137879A (en) * 1998-08-07 2000-10-24 Vxi Corporation Computer telephony headset amplifier
USRE46153E1 (en) 1998-09-11 2016-09-20 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus enabling voice-based management of state and interaction of a remote knowledge worker in a contact center environment
US6393103B1 (en) * 1998-09-22 2002-05-21 Radioshack Corporation Method and apparatus for emulating telephone services
US6754332B1 (en) * 1998-11-02 2004-06-22 Concerto Software, Inc. Object oriented system and method for directing incoming telephone calls
US6317141B1 (en) 1998-12-31 2001-11-13 Flashpoint Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for editing heterogeneous media objects in a digital imaging device
FR2790176B1 (en) * 1999-02-23 2001-05-04 Cit Alcatel SERVER FOR COMMUNICATING n PAIRS OF MACHINES, AND PRIVATE TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK DECT COMPRISING SUCH A SERVER
AU2979499A (en) * 1999-03-02 2000-09-21 Microlog Corporation Method and system for enabling computer terminals in a call center environment to display and perform telephony related functions
US6643705B1 (en) * 1999-03-29 2003-11-04 Microsoft Corporation Routing of electronic messages using a routing map and a stateful script engine
US6345093B1 (en) 1999-04-13 2002-02-05 Davox Corporation System and method for providing automated take back and transfer functionality to a computer telephony system
WO2000062517A1 (en) 1999-04-14 2000-10-19 Vocaldata, Inc. Telephony server
US6493719B1 (en) * 1999-07-26 2002-12-10 Microsoft Corporation Method and system for scripting for system management information
US6373939B1 (en) * 1999-08-20 2002-04-16 Communications And Commerce Corporation Machine assisted system for processing and responding to requests
US7457279B1 (en) 1999-09-10 2008-11-25 Vertical Communications Acquisition Corp. Method, system, and computer program product for managing routing servers and services
US6760324B1 (en) 1999-09-10 2004-07-06 Array Telecom Corporation Method, system, and computer program product for providing voice over the internet communication
US7123608B1 (en) 1999-09-10 2006-10-17 Array Telecom Corporation Method, system, and computer program product for managing database servers and service
US7092509B1 (en) 1999-09-21 2006-08-15 Microlog Corporation Contact center system capable of handling multiple media types of contacts and method for using the same
JP2001119485A (en) * 1999-10-19 2001-04-27 Nec Corp Automatic incoming call distribution system and its method
US6665317B1 (en) * 1999-10-29 2003-12-16 Array Telecom Corporation Method, system, and computer program product for managing jitter
US6701366B1 (en) * 1999-11-09 2004-03-02 Nortel Networks Corporation Providing communications services
DE19954805A1 (en) * 1999-11-13 2001-05-17 Tenovis Gmbh & Co Kg Device for operating with a telecommunication system and method
US6919967B1 (en) 1999-11-18 2005-07-19 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Printing performance enhancements for variable data publishing
US7929978B2 (en) 1999-12-01 2011-04-19 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for providing enhanced communication capability for mobile devices on a virtual private network
US6487479B1 (en) 2000-01-07 2002-11-26 General Electric Co. Methods and systems for aviation component repair services
US7248862B2 (en) * 2000-01-19 2007-07-24 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Method and apparatus for retrieving calling party information in a mobile communications system
US6763104B1 (en) 2000-02-24 2004-07-13 Teltronics, Inc. Call center IVR and ACD scripting method and graphical user interface
US6587556B1 (en) * 2000-02-25 2003-07-01 Teltronics, Inc. Skills based routing method and system for call center
US6603854B1 (en) 2000-02-25 2003-08-05 Teltronics, Inc. System and method for evaluating agents in call center
US7068774B1 (en) * 2000-02-25 2006-06-27 Harris Corporation Integrated acd and ivr scripting for call center tracking of calls
US6707904B1 (en) 2000-02-25 2004-03-16 Teltronics, Inc. Method and system for collecting reports for call center monitoring by supervisor
US7321298B2 (en) 2000-02-25 2008-01-22 Harris Corporation Skills based routing method and system for call center
US6668051B1 (en) 2000-03-28 2003-12-23 Sevis Systems, Inc. Intelligent communications point platform
US6956941B1 (en) * 2000-04-12 2005-10-18 Austin Logistics Incorporated Method and system for scheduling inbound inquiries
US6922685B2 (en) * 2000-05-22 2005-07-26 Mci, Inc. Method and system for managing partitioned data resources
US7463619B1 (en) * 2000-05-25 2008-12-09 Nortel Networks Limited Launching a web browser in response to a message relating to communications sessions
US7076032B1 (en) * 2000-06-14 2006-07-11 Convergys Cmg Utah Inc. Method and system for processing telephone calls by IVR
US7142662B2 (en) 2000-07-11 2006-11-28 Austin Logistics Incorporated Method and system for distributing outbound telephone calls
US7103173B2 (en) * 2001-07-09 2006-09-05 Austin Logistics Incorporated System and method for preemptive goals based routing of contact records
US6816464B1 (en) 2000-09-13 2004-11-09 Array Telecom Corporation Method, system, and computer program product for route quality checking and management
US7890571B1 (en) * 2000-09-22 2011-02-15 Xcelera Inc. Serving dynamic web-pages
US8041023B1 (en) * 2000-09-29 2011-10-18 Aspect Software, Inc. System and method of using a phone to access information in a call center
US6725446B1 (en) * 2000-11-01 2004-04-20 Digital Integrator, Inc. Information distribution method and system
US7299259B2 (en) 2000-11-08 2007-11-20 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for intelligent routing of instant messaging presence protocol (IMPP) events among a group of customer service representatives
US6822945B2 (en) 2000-11-08 2004-11-23 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for anticipating and planning communication-center resources based on evaluation of events waiting in a communication center master queue
US7929562B2 (en) 2000-11-08 2011-04-19 Genesis Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for optimizing response time to events in queue
AU2002220999A1 (en) * 2000-11-22 2002-06-03 Zend Technologies Ltd. Method and apparatus for dynamic shared-memory caching of scripting engine product
JP4644940B2 (en) * 2001-01-17 2011-03-09 ソニー株式会社 Billing method, script conversion system and method
US7139242B2 (en) * 2001-03-28 2006-11-21 Proficient Networks, Inc. Methods, apparatuses and systems facilitating deployment, support and configuration of network routing policies
US20020141378A1 (en) * 2001-03-28 2002-10-03 Bays Robert James Methods, apparatuses and systems facilitating deployment, support and configuration of network routing policies
US9256356B2 (en) 2001-03-29 2016-02-09 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for providing feedback for docking a content pane in a host window
US6771292B2 (en) * 2001-03-29 2004-08-03 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for providing feedback concerning a content pane to be docked in a host window
US7110525B1 (en) 2001-06-25 2006-09-19 Toby Heller Agent training sensitive call routing system
US7054434B2 (en) * 2001-07-09 2006-05-30 Austin Logistics Incorporated System and method for common account based routing of contact records
US7715546B2 (en) * 2001-07-09 2010-05-11 Austin Logistics Incorporated System and method for updating contact records
US7072966B1 (en) * 2001-08-14 2006-07-04 Etalk Corporation Skills-based routing of a communication session
US20030050967A1 (en) * 2001-09-11 2003-03-13 Bentley William F. Apparatus and method for optimal selection of IP modules for design integration
US20030131132A1 (en) * 2002-01-10 2003-07-10 Shih-An Cheng Method and system for a routing server for selecting a PSTN gateway
US7693932B1 (en) * 2002-01-15 2010-04-06 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. System and method for locating a resource locator associated with a resource of interest
KR100454947B1 (en) * 2002-02-18 2004-11-06 삼성전자주식회사 Method for displaying the other part information in private exchange network
EP1337097A1 (en) * 2002-02-19 2003-08-20 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Efficient utilisation of an IVR resource within a telecommunications switch
US7372952B1 (en) 2002-03-07 2008-05-13 Wai Wu Telephony control system with intelligent call routing
US6951009B2 (en) * 2002-03-12 2005-09-27 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation System and method for generating computer code to facilitate development of CDR management tools
US7155205B2 (en) * 2002-03-12 2006-12-26 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation System and method for verifying subscriber data records in a telephone system
US6862343B1 (en) 2002-03-27 2005-03-01 West Corporation Methods, apparatus, scripts, and computer readable media for facilitating secure capture of sensitive data for a voice-based transaction conducted over a telecommunications network
US7209444B2 (en) * 2002-05-15 2007-04-24 Avaya Technology Corp. Methods and devices for balancing communications using match rates
US7403967B1 (en) 2002-06-18 2008-07-22 West Corporation Methods, apparatus, and computer readable media for confirmation and verification of shipping address data associated with a transaction
US6876727B2 (en) 2002-07-24 2005-04-05 Sbc Properties, Lp Voice over IP method for developing interactive voice response system
US6931105B2 (en) * 2002-08-19 2005-08-16 International Business Machines Corporation Correlating call data and speech recognition information in a telephony application
USRE46776E1 (en) 2002-08-27 2018-04-03 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for optimizing response time to events in queue
US7499935B2 (en) * 2002-11-06 2009-03-03 Lawrence Casey J System and method for enabling access to a data source through a graphical interface
US9818136B1 (en) 2003-02-05 2017-11-14 Steven M. Hoffberg System and method for determining contingent relevance
US20040176905A1 (en) * 2003-03-06 2004-09-09 Sanqunetti Douglas Ray Telematics script engine
US7676034B1 (en) 2003-03-07 2010-03-09 Wai Wu Method and system for matching entities in an auction
US7215742B1 (en) * 2003-06-02 2007-05-08 Sprint Communications Company L.P. Troubleshooting interface for client-routed toll-free telephone calls
US8639760B2 (en) * 2003-06-10 2014-01-28 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Hard imaging devices, hard imaging systems, articles of manufacture, hard imaging device electronic mail processing methods
US7421658B1 (en) * 2003-07-30 2008-09-02 Oracle International Corporation Method and system for providing a graphical user interface for a script session
US20050044065A1 (en) * 2003-08-21 2005-02-24 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for enabling national language support of a database engine
US7603443B2 (en) * 2003-08-28 2009-10-13 International Business Machines Corporation Generic method for defining resource configuration profiles in provisioning systems
US7359918B2 (en) * 2003-09-26 2008-04-15 American Tel-A-Systems, Inc. System and method for intelligent script swapping
US7539722B2 (en) * 2003-10-24 2009-05-26 Microsoft Corporation Method and system for accessing a file
US20050132334A1 (en) * 2003-11-14 2005-06-16 Busfield John D. Computer-implemented systems and methods for requirements detection
US7493418B2 (en) * 2003-12-18 2009-02-17 International Business Machines Corporation Generic method for resource monitoring configuration in provisioning systems
US7730451B2 (en) * 2003-12-26 2010-06-01 Microsoft Corporation Source server
US20060050856A1 (en) * 2004-09-03 2006-03-09 Pence Jeffrey W Computer telephony server for scripted call termination
US7574358B2 (en) 2005-02-28 2009-08-11 International Business Machines Corporation Natural language system and method based on unisolated performance metric
US8036374B2 (en) * 2005-05-16 2011-10-11 Noble Systems Corporation Systems and methods for detecting call blocking devices or services
US7517355B2 (en) * 2005-09-08 2009-04-14 Medafor, Incorporated Method of supporting and/or applying particulate materials
US8874477B2 (en) 2005-10-04 2014-10-28 Steven Mark Hoffberg Multifactorial optimization system and method
US7843911B2 (en) * 2005-11-15 2010-11-30 Nominum, Inc. Data grouping approach to telephone number management in domain name systems
US8233609B2 (en) * 2005-11-30 2012-07-31 Noble Systems Corporation Systems and methods for managing call processing for a specific agent
US7830547B2 (en) * 2005-11-30 2010-11-09 Xerox Corporation User interface assistant
US20070127438A1 (en) * 2005-12-01 2007-06-07 Scott Newman Method and system for processing telephone technical support
US8612229B2 (en) * 2005-12-15 2013-12-17 Nuance Communications, Inc. Method and system for conveying an example in a natural language understanding application
US9008075B2 (en) 2005-12-22 2015-04-14 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. System and methods for improving interaction routing performance
US7627854B2 (en) * 2006-01-12 2009-12-01 International Business Machines Corporation Graphical aid for generating object setup scripts
US7697666B2 (en) * 2006-03-30 2010-04-13 International Business Machines Corporation Pre-caching mechanism for optimized business data retrieval for CTI sub-systems
US8300798B1 (en) 2006-04-03 2012-10-30 Wai Wu Intelligent communication routing system and method
US9224145B1 (en) 2006-08-30 2015-12-29 Qurio Holdings, Inc. Venue based digital rights using capture device with digital watermarking capability
US8515912B2 (en) 2010-07-15 2013-08-20 Palantir Technologies, Inc. Sharing and deconflicting data changes in a multimaster database system
US7962495B2 (en) 2006-11-20 2011-06-14 Palantir Technologies, Inc. Creating data in a data store using a dynamic ontology
US8526036B2 (en) * 2008-01-17 2013-09-03 Konica Minolta Laboratory U.S.A., Inc. Systems and methods for print resource management
US8639505B2 (en) 2008-04-23 2014-01-28 Nvoq Incorporated Method and systems for simplifying copying and pasting transcriptions generated from a dictation based speech-to-text system
US8443350B2 (en) * 2008-06-06 2013-05-14 Cornell University System and method for scaling simulations and games
US8306213B1 (en) * 2011-11-22 2012-11-06 Google Inc. Skill and level assignment via concentric inlaid circles
US8813029B2 (en) * 2012-05-24 2014-08-19 International Business Machines Corporation Remote card content management using synchronous server-side scripting
US9110956B2 (en) * 2012-10-12 2015-08-18 Sap Se Integration of statistical languages for reporting
US9081975B2 (en) 2012-10-22 2015-07-14 Palantir Technologies, Inc. Sharing information between nexuses that use different classification schemes for information access control
US9501761B2 (en) 2012-11-05 2016-11-22 Palantir Technologies, Inc. System and method for sharing investigation results
US8903717B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-12-02 Palantir Technologies Inc. Method and system for generating a parser and parsing complex data
US9898167B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-02-20 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for providing a tagging interface for external content
US9740369B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-08-22 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for providing a tagging interface for external content
US8930897B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-01-06 Palantir Technologies Inc. Data integration tool
US9223773B2 (en) 2013-08-08 2015-12-29 Palatir Technologies Inc. Template system for custom document generation
EP3215637B1 (en) 2014-11-03 2019-07-03 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Methods and biomarkers for predicting efficacy and valuation of an ox40 agonist treatment
US9229952B1 (en) 2014-11-05 2016-01-05 Palantir Technologies, Inc. History preserving data pipeline system and method
US10803106B1 (en) 2015-02-24 2020-10-13 Palantir Technologies Inc. System with methodology for dynamic modular ontology
US9727560B2 (en) 2015-02-25 2017-08-08 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for organizing and identifying documents via hierarchies and dimensions of tags
US20160371673A1 (en) * 2015-06-18 2016-12-22 Paypal, Inc. Checkout line processing based on detected information from a user's communication device
US9996595B2 (en) 2015-08-03 2018-06-12 Palantir Technologies, Inc. Providing full data provenance visualization for versioned datasets
US10853378B1 (en) 2015-08-25 2020-12-01 Palantir Technologies Inc. Electronic note management via a connected entity graph
US9576015B1 (en) 2015-09-09 2017-02-21 Palantir Technologies, Inc. Domain-specific language for dataset transformations
US10635407B2 (en) * 2015-10-08 2020-04-28 Micro Focus Llc Identification of differences between scripts for testing applications
US10248722B2 (en) 2016-02-22 2019-04-02 Palantir Technologies Inc. Multi-language support for dynamic ontology
US10698938B2 (en) 2016-03-18 2020-06-30 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for organizing and identifying documents via hierarchies and dimensions of tags
DE102016109938B4 (en) * 2016-05-30 2022-05-25 Unify Patente Gmbh & Co. Kg Method for integrating a communication terminal device as a preferred device in a static configuration of a communication system and a communication system designed for this purpose
US10007674B2 (en) 2016-06-13 2018-06-26 Palantir Technologies Inc. Data revision control in large-scale data analytic systems
US10102229B2 (en) 2016-11-09 2018-10-16 Palantir Technologies Inc. Validating data integrations using a secondary data store
US9946777B1 (en) 2016-12-19 2018-04-17 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for facilitating data transformation
WO2018118983A1 (en) * 2016-12-19 2018-06-28 Interactive Intelligence Group, Inc. System and method for managing contact center system
US9922108B1 (en) 2017-01-05 2018-03-20 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for facilitating data transformation
US10956406B2 (en) 2017-06-12 2021-03-23 Palantir Technologies Inc. Propagated deletion of database records and derived data
US10691729B2 (en) 2017-07-07 2020-06-23 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for providing an object platform for a relational database
US10956508B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-03-23 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for creating and managing a data integration workspace containing automatically updated data models
US10754822B1 (en) 2018-04-18 2020-08-25 Palantir Technologies Inc. Systems and methods for ontology migration
US11461355B1 (en) 2018-05-15 2022-10-04 Palantir Technologies Inc. Ontological mapping of data

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4747127A (en) * 1985-12-23 1988-05-24 American Telephone And Telegraph Company, At&T Bell Laboratories Customer programmable real-time system
US4878240A (en) * 1988-01-25 1989-10-31 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Multi-service telephone switching system
US5206903A (en) * 1990-12-26 1993-04-27 At&T Bell Laboratories Automatic call distribution based on matching required skills with agents skills

Family Cites Families (29)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4695949A (en) * 1984-07-19 1987-09-22 Texas Instruments Incorporated Method for efficient support for reference counting
US4912629A (en) * 1986-06-26 1990-03-27 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Real-time garbage collection for list processing using restructured cells for increased reference counter size
US5168446A (en) * 1989-05-23 1992-12-01 Telerate Systems Incorporated System for conducting and processing spot commodity transactions
US5289368A (en) * 1990-10-12 1994-02-22 Iex Corporation Force management system user interface
US5202963A (en) * 1990-12-18 1993-04-13 Bull Hn Information Systems Inc. Method and apparatus for adapting a remote communications controller to a variety of types of communications modems
US5481694A (en) * 1991-09-26 1996-01-02 Hewlett-Packard Company High performance multiple-unit electronic data storage system with checkpoint logs for rapid failure recovery
US5581760A (en) * 1992-07-06 1996-12-03 Microsoft Corporation Method and system for referring to and binding to objects using identifier objects
DE69316631T2 (en) * 1992-08-31 1998-07-16 Dow Chemical Co SCREENPLAY BASED SYSTEM FOR TESTING A MULTI-USER COMPUTER SYSTEM
US5590188A (en) * 1992-11-09 1996-12-31 Iex Corporation Rules-based call routing
CA2102868C (en) * 1992-11-11 1999-10-26 Joseph E. Bloom Device for programming script sets in a telephone system
US5404528A (en) * 1993-01-19 1995-04-04 Canon Information Systems, Inc. Scripting system
GB9314460D0 (en) * 1993-07-13 1993-08-25 Int Computers Ltd Computer systems integration
WO1995004960A2 (en) * 1993-08-02 1995-02-16 Persistence Software, Inc. Method and apparatus for managing relational data in an object cache
JP3595564B2 (en) * 1993-10-27 2004-12-02 キヤノン株式会社 Document processing apparatus and method
SE502423C2 (en) * 1994-02-15 1995-10-16 Ellemtel Utvecklings Ab Systems for managing interaction between additional services in a telecommunications system
US5655015A (en) * 1994-02-18 1997-08-05 Aurora Systems, Inc. Computer-telephone integration system
EP0767940B1 (en) * 1994-06-30 2000-03-08 Intel Corporation Data pre-fetch for script-based multimedia systems
US5504892A (en) * 1994-09-08 1996-04-02 Taligent, Inc. Extensible object-oriented file system
US5546452A (en) * 1995-03-02 1996-08-13 Geotel Communications Corp. Communications system using a central controller to control at least one network and agent system
US5689799A (en) * 1995-04-26 1997-11-18 Wink Communications, Inc. Method and apparatus for routing confidential information
US5761684A (en) * 1995-05-30 1998-06-02 International Business Machines Corporation Method and reusable object for scheduling script execution in a compound document
US5946377A (en) * 1995-10-10 1999-08-31 Ast Research, Inc. Script-based DTMF information retrieval system
WO1997018661A1 (en) * 1995-11-13 1997-05-22 Answersoft, Inc. Intelligent information routing system and method
US5801685A (en) * 1996-04-08 1998-09-01 Tektronix, Inc. Automatic editing of recorded video elements sychronized with a script text read or displayed
US5727156A (en) * 1996-04-10 1998-03-10 Hotoffice Technologies, Inc. Internet-based automatic publishing system
US5854930A (en) * 1996-12-30 1998-12-29 Mci Communications Corporations System, method, and computer program product for script processing
US6078743A (en) * 1997-11-24 2000-06-20 International Business Machines Corporation Generic IDE interface support for scripting
US6292936B1 (en) * 1998-11-12 2001-09-18 International Business Machines Corporation Enabling multiple runtime processors in an interpreter-based embedded scripting system
US6311320B1 (en) * 1998-12-07 2001-10-30 Lsi Logic Corporation Alterable scripting tool and method

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4747127A (en) * 1985-12-23 1988-05-24 American Telephone And Telegraph Company, At&T Bell Laboratories Customer programmable real-time system
US4878240A (en) * 1988-01-25 1989-10-31 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Multi-service telephone switching system
US5206903A (en) * 1990-12-26 1993-04-27 At&T Bell Laboratories Automatic call distribution based on matching required skills with agents skills

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9042372B2 (en) 1998-09-24 2015-05-26 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Call transfer using session initiation protocol (SIP)
USRE46675E1 (en) 2001-08-10 2018-01-16 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Integrating SIP control messaging into existing communication center routing infrastructure
US9794411B2 (en) 2002-06-17 2017-10-17 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Call transfer using session initiation protocol (SIP)
USRE46751E1 (en) 2002-06-17 2018-03-06 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Call transfer using session initiation protocol (SIP)
US10148820B2 (en) 2002-06-17 2018-12-04 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. Call transfer using session initiation protocol (SIP)
US7631198B2 (en) * 2005-05-10 2009-12-08 Seagate Technology Protocol scripting language for safe execution in embedded system
US7286661B1 (en) 2007-05-01 2007-10-23 Unison Technologies Llc Systems and methods for scalable hunt-group management
US7738650B2 (en) 2007-05-01 2010-06-15 Unison Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for scalable hunt-group management
US7783023B2 (en) 2007-05-16 2010-08-24 Unison Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for providing unified collaboration systems with conditional communication handling
US11792091B1 (en) 2017-10-12 2023-10-17 United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) Reconnection routing for service sessions

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US5870464A (en) 1999-02-09
US6539538B1 (en) 2003-03-25
AU1119097A (en) 1997-06-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6539538B1 (en) Intelligent information routing system and method
US6100891A (en) Call center agent interface and development tool
US7221377B1 (en) Apparatus and method for collecting and displaying information in a workflow system
US6889375B1 (en) Method and system for application development
US5390232A (en) System for control of subscriber progragmmability
US6611498B1 (en) Integrated customer web station for web based call management
US6311164B1 (en) Remote job application method and apparatus
US6603854B1 (en) System and method for evaluating agents in call center
US6707904B1 (en) Method and system for collecting reports for call center monitoring by supervisor
US6587556B1 (en) Skills based routing method and system for call center
US6493695B1 (en) Methods and systems for homogeneously routing and/or queueing call center customer interactions across media types
US7068774B1 (en) Integrated acd and ivr scripting for call center tracking of calls
US6763104B1 (en) Call center IVR and ACD scripting method and graphical user interface
US6493447B1 (en) Contact server for call center for syncronizing simultaneous telephone calls and TCP/IP communications
US6782087B1 (en) Desktop telephony application program for a call center agent
CA1258548A (en) System and method for defining and providing telephone network services
US6587543B1 (en) System and method for the automated testing of a telecommunications system
US20050152344A1 (en) System and methods for dynamic integration of a voice application with one or more Web services
US20110179398A1 (en) Systems and methods for per-action compiling in contact handling systems
US7739325B1 (en) Apparatus and method for extensible real-time workflows
JPH06253019A (en) Controller and compiler
JPH0670782B2 (en) Programmable interface system and method
CA2176177A1 (en) Method for consolidation of multiple data sources
EP0572544A1 (en) Integrated application controlled call processing and messaging system.
WO1996016500A1 (en) Voice response system with programming language extension

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE HU IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): KE LS MW SD SZ UG AT BE CH DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: CA